Mercedes-Benz 2003 CL 55 AMG Operator`s manual

CL 500
CL 600
CL 55 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
as well as your and your passengers’ safety, we ask you to make a small investment
of time:
앫
Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to
your vehicle where it will be handy for
your reference.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and Warranty Information.. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle
outside the USA or Canada ............ 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
At a glance .......................................... 19
Cockpit................................................. 20
Instrument cluster ................................ 22
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 24
Center console ..................................... 25
Upper part ...................................... 25
Lower part ...................................... 26
Overhead control panel ........................ 27
Door control panel................................ 28
Getting started ...................................
Unlocking .............................................
Unlocking with the SmartKey .........
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*.........
Adjusting ..............................................
Seats ..............................................
Steering wheel................................
Mirrors............................................
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belts .................
Starting the engine .........................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals and high beam ............
Windshield wipers...........................
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking ..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off engine...........................
29
30
30
32
34
34
37
38
40
40
42
46
46
47
48
49
50
50
51
Contents
Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety...................................
Airbags ...........................................
Seat belts .......................................
Children in the vehicle....................
Blocking of rear window operation .
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving safety systems.........................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
ESP.................................................
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system ..................
Tow-away alarm .............................
53
54
55
60
63
69
70
70
70
71
71
73
73
76
76
77
78
Controls in detail ...............................
Locking and unlocking .........................
SmartKey .......................................
KEYLESS-GO card* ........................
Opening the doors
from the inside ...............................
Opening the trunk lid
from the inside ...............................
Opening the trunk lid
from the outside.............................
Trunk lid emergency release ..........
Closing the trunk lid .......................
Separately locking the trunk ..........
Separately unlocking the trunk ......
Trunk lid
opening/closing system*..............
Power closing assist
for doors and trunk lid....................
Automatic central locking ..............
Locking and unlocking
from the inside ...............................
79
80
80
83
87
88
89
89
90
90
91
91
94
94
95
Seats .................................................... 96
Lumbar support .............................. 96
Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 96
Head restraints ............................... 97
Multicontour seat*.......................... 99
Folding forward
front seat backrests..................... 100
Seat ventilation* .......................... 102
Seat heating................................. 103
Memory function ............................... 105
Storing positions into memory ..... 106
Recalling positions
from memory ............................... 106
Storing exterior rear
view mirror parking position ........ 107
Lighting ............................................. 108
Exterior lamp switch .................... 108
Combination switch ..................... 111
Hazard warning flasher ................ 111
Interior lighting ............................ 112
Courtesy lighting.......................... 113
Contents
Instrument cluster .............................
Instrument cluster illumination ....
Coolant temperature gauge .........
Trip odometer ..............................
Tachometer..................................
Outside temperature indicator .....
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
Standard display menu ................
AUDIO menu ................................
CD changer operating mode ........
TEL menu* ...................................
NAVI menu...................................
Distronic* menu...........................
Trip computer menu.....................
Malfunction memory menu ..........
Settings menu..............................
114
114
115
115
115
116
117
117
118
120
122
122
123
125
127
128
129
130
131
Automatic transmission...................... 143
One-touch gearshifting ................. 144
Gear ranges .................................. 145
Gear selector lever position .......... 146
Program mode selector switch ..... 147
Accelerator position...................... 148
Emergency operation
(Limp home mode)........................ 148
Steering wheel gearshift control
(Speedshift) and manual
shift program CL 55 AMG ............. 149
Good visibility ..................................... 151
Rear view mirror ........................... 151
Windshield wipers......................... 154
Headlamp cleaning system ........... 154
Sun visors ..................................... 155
Rear window sunshade ................. 156
Automatic climate control .................. 157
Setting the temperature ............... 160
Adjusting air distribution .............. 161
Adjusting air volume ..................... 162
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL........ 162
Defrosting..................................... 162
Air recirculation mode .................. 163
Charcoal filter ............................... 164
Rear window defroster.................. 165
Deactivating the climate
control system.............................. 166
Air conditioning ............................ 166
Residual heat and ventilation........ 167
Ventilated storage compartment
under armrest............................... 167
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents ...................... 168
Contents
Power windows ..................................
Opening and closing
the windows .................................
Synchronizing power windows .....
Sliding/pop-up roof...........................
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof .....................
Synchronizing the
sliding/pop-up roof .....................
Driving systems .................................
Cruise control...............................
Distronic*.....................................
Active Body Control (ABC)............
Parktronic system*
(Parking assist).............................
Loading ..............................................
Roof rack*....................................
Loading instructions.....................
Cargo tie-down hooks ..................
169
169
172
173
173
175
176
176
179
190
193
197
197
197
198
Useful features ..................................
Interior storage spaces ................
Ashtrays .......................................
Cigarette lighter ...........................
Heated steering wheel* ...............
Telephone* ..................................
Tele Aid ........................................
Garage door opener .....................
Infrared reflecting windshield.......
199
199
206
207
208
208
209
217
221
Operation ........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .........
Driving instructions............................
Drive sensibly – save fuel.............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes..........................................
223
224
225
225
225
225
225
226
Driving off ....................................
Parking.........................................
Tires.............................................
Hydroplaning................................
Tire traction .................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water.............................
Passenger compartment..............
Driving abroad .............................
Control and operation
of radio transmitters ....................
Catalytic converter.......................
Emission control ..........................
Coolant temperature....................
At the gas station ..............................
Check regularly
and before a long trip...................
227
227
228
229
229
229
230
231
231
231
232
232
233
234
235
236
Contents
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level................
Active Body Control (ABC)
fluid level......................................
Coolant ........................................
Battery .........................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system...........
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Life of tires...................................
Direction of rotation.....................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Rotating wheels ...........................
Winter driving ....................................
Winter tires ..................................
Block heater*...............................
Snow chains.................................
237
237
238
242
242
242
243
244
246
246
247
247
247
251
252
252
253
253
Maintenance....................................... 254
Clearing the service indicator ....... 254
Service term exceeded ................. 254
Calling up the service indicator..... 255
Resetting the service indicator ..... 255
Vehicle care........................................ 256
Cleaning and care of vehicle ......... 256
Practical hints .................................. 263
What to do if …? ................................. 264
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 264
Lamp in center console................. 269
Messages in the display................ 270
Where will I find...? ............................. 295
First aid kit.................................... 295
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit,
luggage bowl, spare wheel............ 295
Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 297
Unlocking the vehicle.................... 297
Locking the vehicle ....................... 298
Changing batteries........................ 299
Fuel filler flap ................................ 300
Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 301
Sliding/pop-up roof ...................... 301
Replacing bulbs .................................. 302
Bulbs............................................. 302
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 304
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 305
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 307
Removing...................................... 307
Installing ....................................... 307
Flat tire............................................... 308
Preparing the vehicle .................... 308
Mounting the spare wheel ............ 308
Battery ............................................... 313
Disconnecting the battery ............ 314
Removing the battery ................... 314
Charging and reinstalling
the battery .................................... 314
Reconnecting the battery ............. 315
Jump starting...................................... 316
Towing the vehicle.............................. 318
Installing towing eye bolt .............. 321
Contents
Fuses .................................................
Fuse boxes in passenger
compartment................................
Fuse boxes in engine
compartment................................
Emergency engine shut-down ......
322
Technical data..................................
Spare parts service ............................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet......................
Identification labels............................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive .................
CL 500 .........................................
CL 55 AMG...................................
CL 600 .........................................
325
326
327
322
324
324
327
328
329
329
329
329
Engine................................................
Rims and Tires ...................................
Same size tires.............................
Mixed size tires ............................
Spare wheel .................................
Electrical system ...............................
Main Dimensions ...............................
Weights..............................................
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ..........
Capacities ....................................
Engine oils....................................
Engine oil additives ......................
Air conditioning refrigerant ..........
Brake fluid....................................
Premium unleaded gasoline .........
Fuel requirements ........................
Gasoline additives ........................
Coolants.......................................
Windshield and headlamp
washer system .............................
330
331
332
333
333
334
335
336
337
337
339
339
339
340
340
340
341
342
344
Consumer information....................... 345
Uniform tire quality grading ......... 345
Technical terms............................... 347
Index................................................. 353
Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and
accessories explicitly approved by us for
your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
receive comprehensive information, including permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be
performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
Service and Warranty Information
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
앫
New Car Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only)
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws)
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
Change of address or ownership
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
Always have the Service Booklet with you
when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
앫
Service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available.
앫
Unleaded gasoline for vehicles with
catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts.
앫
Gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
13
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color so you can find
information quickly.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Operation
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
14
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Service Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄
Page
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
->
In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to
cross-reference term definitions.
DISPLAY
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to malfunction or cease functioning completely. Because the vehicle’s
electronic components are interconnected,
any modification made may produce an undesired effect on other systems.
Electronic system malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
Make sure that any repairs or modifications
to electronic components are carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
16
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
The safety precautions in this manual
앫
The “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
Traffic rules and regulations
앫
Motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
18
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
19
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
Page
1 Combination switch
앫
Turn signals
46
앫
Windshield wipers
47
앫
High beam
111
2 Cruise control lever
Item
Page
6 Lever for voice control system* (see separate operating instructions)
7 Parking assist* (Parktronic)
right front area warning indicator
앫
Cruise control
176
8 Overhead control panel
앫
Distronic*
179
9 Glove box lock
15 Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
Heated steering wheel*
195
16 Parking brake pedal
17 Hood lock release
Page
37
208
44
237
18 Parking brake release
44
199
19 Door control panel
28
20 Exterior lamp switch
46,
108
21 Headlamp washer button
154
22 Parking assist* (Parktronic)
left front area warning indicator
195
27
3 Instrument cluster
22,
111
10 Glove box lid release
199
11 Glove box
199
4 Multifunction steering
wheel
24,
118
12 Center console
25,
26
22
13 Starter switch
31
5 Gear range indicator, clock
Item
14 Horn
21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
1 Coolant temperature
gauge
Page
115
3 L Left turn signal
indicator lamp
K Right turn signal
indicator lamp
1
6 Right display with:
46
A High beam headlamp indicator
111
46
< Seat belt nonusage
warning lamp
266
268
7 J
v Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
warning lamp
264
l Distance warning
lamp1
265
115
Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning lamp without
function. It illuminates with SmartKey in starter
switch position 2. It should go out when the engine
is running.
Reset button
Item
Page
Stored speed for:
265
4 Speedometer with:
5 Tachometer
Page
- Antilock Brake System (ABS) malfunction indicator lamp
2 Fuel gauge with:
Fuel reserve warning lamp
Item
114
8 Display with:
Program mode
147
Gear range indicator
145
Digital clock (see
COMAND operating
instructions)
9 Multifunction display
with:
Trip odometer
117
Main odometer
117
Cruise control or
176
Distronic*
179
10 Outside temperature indicator
115
11 Left display with:
1 Supplemental
restraint system
indicator lamp
266
; Brake warning
lamp, except
Canada
267
3 Brake warning
lamp, Canada only
267
? Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
268
12 Knob for instrument cluster illumination
114
23
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel
Item
1 Multifunction display
Operating control
system
2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume
ç down/to decrease
æ up/to increase
3 Telephone*: Press button
í to take a call
to dial a call
ì to end a call
to reject an
incoming call
24
Page
117
118
Item
4 Menu systems: Press
button
è for next system
ÿ for previous system
5 Scrolling within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
Page
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Rear window sunshade
156
2 Parking assist* (Parktronic
system) deactivation
switch
193
3 Active Body Control (ABC)
190
10 Tow-away alarm switch
4 Level control switch
191
95
11 COMAND (see separate
operating instructions)
77
12 Automatic climate control
157
13 Ashtray
206
Lighter
207
5 Central locking switch
Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp
6 Hazard warning flasher
on/off switch
7 Central unlocking switch
111
8 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) control switch
75
9 Rear seat head restraints,
switch for folding down
97
78
95
25
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
1 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button
2 Selector lever for
automatic transmission
3 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp
26
Page
33, 43
43,
145
65
4 Thumbwheel for setting
distance in Distronic*
187
5 Distance warning function* on/off switch
187
6 Program mode selector for
automatic transmission
147
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
112
2 Rear interior lighting
on/off
112
3 Right reading lamp on/off
112
4 Interior lighting control
112
5 Sliding/pop-up roof
173
6 Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone* and
voice control system* (see
separate operating instructions)
7 Rear view mirror
38,
151
8 Garage door opener
217
9 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
209
27
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Item
1 Door handle
87
2 Memory function (for storing seat, mirror and steering wheel settings)
105
3 Seat heating
103
Item
6 Switches for opening/
closing front door windows
7 Rear window
override switch
Seat ventilation*
102
4 Seat adjustment
34, 96
5 Exterior mirror adjustment
28
Page
38,
151
8 Switches for opening/
closing rear windows
9 Remote trunk lid release
switch
Trunk lid opening/closing
system* switch
Page
169
69
169
88
91
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
29
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking
The“Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Unlocking with the SmartKey
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will help you with further information. The corresponding page references are at the end of each segment.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two keys are a different color
to help distinguish each key unit.
Your vehicle comes equipped with two
SmartKeys with integrated remote controls and removable mechanical key.
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 70)
30
왘
Press unlock button Πon the key.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
왘
Get in the vehicle and insert the key in
the starter switch.
i
Opening a door causes the windows on
that side of the car to open slightly.
They will return to the up position when
the door is closed.
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Starter switch
0 For removing key
1 Power supply for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
!
If the key is left in starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the starter
switch.
왘
Remove the key from the starter
switch and reinsert.
If the key can still not be turned, the
battery may not be sufficiently
charged.
왘
Check the battery and charge it
if necessary (컄 page 313).
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 316).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the key from the
starter switch.
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: in addition to
the two SmartKeys with remote controls
and removable mechanical key, your vehicle comes equipped with two KEYLESS-GO* cards.
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function.
If you have the KEYLESS-GO function, your
vehicle checks whether the KEYLESS-GO
card is valid when you grasp the door handle. If your KEYLESS-GO card is valid, the
doors will unlock, and you can open them.
i
To unlock the vehicle, the KEYLESS-GO
card must be outside the vehicle, no
further than approx. 3 feet (1 meter)
away from the door.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key and the KEYLESS-GO card with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
왘
Grasp the door handle.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs on the doors move up.
Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the selector lever corresponds to
turning the key to the various starter
switch positions.
32
Getting started
Unlocking
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
Do not depress the brake pedal.
Position 1
왘
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (as with key removed).
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once.
This supplies power to some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button twice, the power
supply is switched off.
Ignition (or position 2)
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice in immediate succession.
This supplies power to all electrical
consumers. All the lights in the instrument cluster light up.
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is again switched off.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 83).
For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄 page 43).
33
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back reclined. Sitting in an extremely reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
34
Warning!
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the front passenger airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
Warning!
Seats
Warning!
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO* card with you, and lock your vehicle.
The power seats can also be operated with
the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Getting started
Adjusting
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Seat adjustment
왘
Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop
button once or twice.
or
왘
Open the driver’s or passenger door.
The seat adjustment switches are located
in each door.
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat cushion depth
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
6 Seat backrest tilt
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat cushion depth
Head restraint height
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 1.
Seat height
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 2.
Seat cushion tilt
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs
are lightly supported.
36
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 4 until your
legs are supported comfortably.
Seat backrest tilt
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 6 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 5.
Head restraint tilt
Adjust to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far to the rear as
possible, corresponding to the driver’s
ability to properly operate the controls.
i
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
왘
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint. Push or pull on the lower
edge of the head restraint cushion.
Getting started
Adjusting
i
The front passenger seat head restraint
automatically lowers after a few seconds when the front passenger seat is
not occupied.This improves the driver's
outward view as well as the forward
view from the rear passenger compartment.
When the front passenger seat is occupied again, the front passenger head
restraint returns to the last set position
within a few seconds.
If the front passenger seat was moved
fore or aft while not being occupied,
the front passenger seat head restraint
returns to a position that corresponds
best with the seat's axial position when
the seat is occupied again.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 97).
Steering wheel
Warning!
Steering wheel adjustment
G
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is
located on the steering column (lower left).
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, and take the
KEYLESS-GO* card with you.
The steering wheel adjustment feature can
also be operated with the driver’s door
open. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
1 Steering column, lengthen or shorten
2 Steering column, height
왘
Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop
button once or twice.
or
왘
Open the driver’s or passenger door.
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering column, lengthen or shorten
왘
Move stalk forward or backward in the
direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Adjust the inside and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Steering column, height
왘
Move the stalk up or down in the direction of arrow 2. Make sure that your
legs can move freely and that all the
displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible.
Please refer to “Controls in detail” for information on the heated steering wheel*
(컄 page 208).
38
Inside rear view mirror
Mirrors
Warning!
G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
왘
Manually adjust the inside rear view
mirror.
Exterior rear view mirror
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
Getting started
Adjusting
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
왘
Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
All the lights in the instrument cluster
light up.
왘
Press button 1 for the left mirror or
button 2 for the right mirror.
왘
Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
left or right according to the desired
setting.
!
Information on how to reposition the
exterior mirror housing when it was
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the
rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit
from the front) can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section
(컄 page 153)
i
At low ambient temperatures, the mirrors will be heated automatically.
Information on the electrically folding exterior rear view mirrors can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 152).
1 Driver’s side mirror
2 Passenger side mirror
3 Adjustment button
39
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Warning!
G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell leave sufficient clearance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between or underneath the pedals. You could then no
longer brake or accelerate.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
40
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as expected if the occupants are using their seat
belts (컄 page 54).
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
Getting started
Driving
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an extremely reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in an upright position
and the belt is properly positioned on the
body.
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 58).
1 Release button
2 Buckle
3 Latch plate
왘
With a smooth motion, pull the belt out
of the seat belt outlet.
왘
Place the belt over your shoulder.
왘
Push latch plate 3 into buckle 2 until it
clicks.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
41
Getting started
Driving
Proper use of seat belts
Warning!
G
Starting the engine
앫
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck or pass under the
arm).
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Warning!
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
앫
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time.
앫
Check your seat belt during travel to
ensure that it is properly positioned.
앫
Ensure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly. You should avoid wearing
bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
when traveling in the vehicle.
앫
42
G
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open.
Getting started
Driving
Automatic transmission
Starting with the SmartKey
왘
Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄 page 31).
i
You can also use the “touch-start”
function. Turn the key to position 3 and
release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position with selector lever lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
왘
Make sure that the gear selector lever
is set to P.
왘
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
왘
The selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off engine
with the SmartKey” (컄 page 51).
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
You can start your vehicle without a key
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
on the gear selector lever.
Firmly depress the brake pedal during
the starting procedure. Do not depress
accelerator.
The selector lever lock is released.
왘
Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button 1 once.
The engine starts automatically.
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off engine
with KEYLESS-GO” (컄 page 51).
43
Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described
above, carry out the following steps:
왘
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey, turn key in starter switch to
position 0 and repeat starting procedure.
왘
If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO: Close all doors to allow
for better detection of the KEYLESS-GO
card.
Or:
Start the engine with the key as radio
signals from another source may be interfering with the KEYLESS-GO card.
왘
Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 42). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 316).
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
44
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Parking brake
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO* card with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking
brake, which could result in an accident
and/or serious injury.
왘
Release the parking brake by pulling on
handle 2.
The indicator lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.
1 Parking brake pedal
2 Parking brake release handle
Getting started
Driving
Driving
왘
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
왘
Move selector lever in position D or R.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system
(컄 page 139).
!
If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
After a cold start the automatic transmission engages at a higher engine speed.
This allows the catalytic converter to reach
its operating temperature faster.
i
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out
of P or N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
i
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
45
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 108).
i
To signal minor directional changes,
e.g. passing or changing lanes, move
combination switch to point of resistance only and release. The turn signal
blinks three times.
Turn signals and high beam
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.
High beam
왘
Switching on headlamps
Push the combination switch forward.
The high beam headlights are switched
on.
The high beam symbol A in the
tachometer lights up.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 111).
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
Exterior lamp switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘
Turn the switch to B.
46
왘
Press the combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
Getting started
Driving
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is on the left of the
steering column.
Switching on windshield wipers
왘
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield.
Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
I
Intermittent wiping
II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
Single wipe
왘
i
Combination switch
1 Single wipe
2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Make sure that the ignition is switched
on.
Press switch briefly in the direction of
arrow 1.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
The intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield.
Wiping will not occur with a door open.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
!
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to
an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
the presence of water sprayed on the
windshield, and wipers may be damaged as a result.
왘
Press switch in the direction of arrow 1
past the resistance point.
The windshield wiper operates with
washer fluid.
컄컄
47
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving
!
If leaves, snow, etc. block the windshield wipers, switch off the wipers.
앫
For safety reasons, withdraw key
from starter switch. Remove blockage.
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
The engine runs erratically and misfires
왘
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
왘
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position I:
앫
앫
Set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed.
앫
Have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
48
In case of accident
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
major assemblies
The coolant temperature is over 248°F
(120°C)
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool.
왘
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 242).
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows:
Warning!
G
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the key from the starter switch. The
vehicle cannot be steered when the key is
removed.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake or steer the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
앫
Turn the key to starter switch position 0
and remove, or press start/stop button
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the key or the KEYLESS-GO* card
and lock vehicle when leaving.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the
vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the selector lever to position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
49
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking brake
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO* card with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking
brake and/or move the gear selector lever
from position P, either of which could result
in an accident and/or serious injury.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 43).
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
Switching off headlamps
1 Parking brake
2 Release handle
왘
Step firmly on parking brake 1.
When the engine is running, the indicator lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster will
be illuminated.
50
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 46).
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 108).
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off engine
왘
!
With the SmartKey removed and the
driver’s door open, a warning sounds if
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off.
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P.
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the curb.
Turning off engine with the SmartKey
왘
왘
Turn the key in the starter switch
(컄 page 31) to position 0 and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 41).
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
왘
After exiting the vehicle press the lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄 page 30).
The locking knobs on the doors move
down. The turn signal indicators light
up briefly.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 80).
Turning off engine with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Place the gear selector lever in P.
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button until the engine shuts off.
With the driver's door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as key removed from starter switch. The immobilizer is activated (컄 page 31).
컄컄
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 41).
i
Opening a door causes the windows on
that side of the car to open slightly.
They will return to the up position when
the door is closed.
!
If you hear a warning signal you have either
앫
forgotten to turn off the lights, or
앫
not put the gear selector lever in P
before opening the driver’s door.
Turn off the lights or place the gear selector lever in P.
Warning!
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
52
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO* card with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 80).
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Warning!
1 Lock button on the door handle
왘
After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button 1 on the door handle or on the
trunk lid (컄 page 86).
The locking knobs on the doors move
down. The turn signal indicators light
up briefly.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
53
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up
앫
The restraint systems are:
앫
Seat belts
앫
Emergency tensioning device
앫
Airbags
앫
Child seats
앫
Child seat recognition
앫
Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH)
As independent systems their protective
effects work in conjunction with each other.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 63).
54
앫
for about four seconds when you turn
the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button once. It then goes
out briefly, lights up again and remains
lit until you start the engine.
for about four seconds when you start
the engine by turning the key or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
i
The 1 indicator lamp lights up and
remains lit if the key is turned to position 2 and left there or the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button is
pressed twice. The indicator lamp will
go out when you start the engine.
The restraint systems are fully operational
if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when
the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been detected, if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫
fails to go out after approximately four
seconds.
앫
does not come on at all.
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving.
For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 266).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 malfunction indicator lamp lights up during driving or does
not come on at all, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Improper work on the restraint systems, including incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Airbags
Warning!
Warning!
G
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential
of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front airbags), side impacts (side impact airbags and head protection window
curtain airbags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). However, no
system available today can totally eliminate
injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
G
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear your
seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the seat backrest.
Fasten your seat belt and ensure that it is
properly positioned on your body.
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
앫
Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the seat backrest.
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least
10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
앫
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
56
앫
앫
Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the side airbag inflates. This
could result in serious injuries or death
should the airbag be triggered. Always
sit upright, properly use the seat belts
and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.
Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
be struck by the airbag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
to make the buyer aware of these points. Be
sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manual.
Warning!
G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
12 years old or under in the front passenger
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
turn off the passenger front airbag.
BabySmartTM will not, however, turn off any
side impact airbag.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact airbags there is a
possibility for a side airbag related injury if
occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side
airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a
side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side airbag inflates. This could result in
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
serious injuries or death should the side
airbag be activated.
(2) Always sit upright, properly use the seat
belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have both rear side
airbags deactivated, then deactivation can
be accomplished upon your written request
to do so at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center at an additional cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal impacts (front air bags),
side impacts (side impact and head
protection window curtain airbags)
which exceed preset thresholds and in
certain rollovers (head protection window curtain airbags). Only during these
events will they provide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for airbags to provide
their supplemental protection.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important
for your safety and the safety of your
passengers that you replace deployed
airbags and repair any malfunctioning
airbags to ensure that the vehicle will
continue to provide supplemental
crash protection for occupants.
In case of other types of impacts and
impacts below airbag deployment
thresholds, airbags will not be activated. The driver and passenger will then
be protected to the extent possible by
a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to
provide the best possible protection in
a rollover.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
airbag
Warning!
앫
앫
58
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front passenger airbag cover, door trim panels, or door frame
trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near
SRS components and wiring. Keep area
between airbags and occupants free
from objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
앫
An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
has inflated. Do not touch.
앫
Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
앫
In addition, through improper work
there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫
앫
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫
Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries
when curtain airbag is deployed.
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment.
앫
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An airbag
or emergency tensioning device (ETD)
that was activated must be replaced.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
The front passenger airbag will only be deployed if:
앫
the front passenger seat is occupied.
앫
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp in the center console is not lit
(컄 page 65).
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
Front airbags
Driver and passenger airbags are deployed:
!
Do not place objects heavier than 20
lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side
to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system's deployment threshold.
앫
in the event of a frontal impact
Side impact airbags, window curtain
airbags
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
The side impact airbags and window curtain airbags are deployed:
앫
independently of the side impact airbags
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front airbags
In addition, the window curtain airbags 1
are deployed:
앫
1 Driver’s airbag
2 Passenger airbag
in certain vehicle rollovers
The side impact airbags 2 and 3 are not
deployed in impacts which do not exceed
the system’s deployment threshold.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The front passenger side impact airbag 2
will only deploy if the system senses that
the front passenger seat is occupied.
The window curtain airbags fill up the area
between the A and C pillars (see arrows).
Seat belts
The seat belt nonusage warning lamp <
in the instrument cluster lights up and a
warning sounds for a short time when you
turn the key in the starter switch to
position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button twice and the drivers
seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the engine, the seat belt nonusage warning lamp blinks for a brief period to remind the driver and passengers to
fasten the seat belts.
1 Window curtain airbag
2 Front side impact airbags
3 Rear side impact airbags
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in
most states, the District of Columbia and
all Canadian provinces. Even where this is
not the case, all vehicle occupants should
have their seat belts fastened at all times
when driving or riding in the vehicle.
Information on fastening seat belts is
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 40).
60
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 63).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an extremely reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in an upright position
and the belt is properly positioned on the
body.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Have all work carried out only by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
앫
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver’s airbag,
front passenger airbag, side impact airbags, head protection window curtain
airbags for side windows), ETD (seat belt
emergency tensioning device), and front
seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in
certain frontal (front airbags) and side
(side impact and window curtain airbags) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in
62
certain rollovers (window curtain airbags).
G
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
앫
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these
might cause injuries.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases when the seat belts are fastened:
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level
앫
in certain vehicle rollovers
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly. See 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 54).
In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
Warning!
G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When scrapping the emergency tensioning
device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Do not place objects heavier than 20
lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat.
This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side
to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system's deployment threshold.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
seats reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use.
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Ensure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Infant and child restraint systems
Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that
the special seat belt retractor is activated.
The belt is now locked. Push down on child
restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
i
Information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages
(컄 page 67).
For information on “LATCH”-type child
seat mounts (컄 page 68).
64
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
!
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories
and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
child restraint lower anchorage system
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.
1 Indicator lamp
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Special BabySmartTM compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are
required for use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system. With the special
child seat properly installed, the passenger
front airbag will not deploy.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp 1 located in the center console will
be illuminated, except with the key removed or in the starter switch position 0.
i
The system does not deactivate the
side impact airbag and the emergency
tensioning device.
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
After turning the key in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indi-
66
cator lamp 1 located in the center console
lights up for approx. 6 seconds and then
goes out.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any
child on the passenger seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 269).
Warning!
G
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
Warning!
G
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the front passenger seat, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
remains illuminated.
Please be sure to check the indicator every
time you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
system. Such signal interference may cause
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
not to come on during self-test or be continuously lit, indicating that the system is not
functioning.
1 Cover of top anchorage ring
왘
Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring.
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
왘
Store cover 1 in a convenient place
(e.g. glove box).
This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
왘
Guide tether strap between head restraint and top of seat back.
Head restraint must be positioned such
that the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and the top of
seat back.
Make sure that the tether strap is not
twisted.
2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring
왘
Securely fasten hook 2, which is part of
the tether strap, to anchorage ring 3.
i
For safety, please make sure that the
hook has attached to the ring beyond
the safety catch, as illustrated.
왘
Reinstall cover after removing the tether strap.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Child seat anchors – “LATCH” type
i
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the outer rear
seats) for the installation of a “LATCH”
child seat with the matching anchor fittings.
The child seat must be firmly attached
in the right and left side anchor fittings.
Non-“LATCH” type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
If you have not installed a child seat, the
“LATCH” mounting anchor fittings are covered with an upholstery blend.
2 Indicates the position of the anchors
3 Anchors
왘
1 Upholstery blend.
왘
Remove upholstery blend 1 and store it
in the rear center armrest.
68
Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
Blocking of rear window operation
i
The override switch is located on the driver’s door.
Operation of the rear windows with the
switches located in the driver’s door is
still possible.
Warning!
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchors 3.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to your child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
G
1 Override switch
Activating override switch
왘
Slide override switch 1 to the right.
The functions in the rear are disabled.
Deactivating override switch
왘
Slide override switch 1 to the left.
The functions in the rear are enabled
again.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the KEYLESS-GO* card with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment
can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
For more information on power windows,
see the “Controls in detail” section
(컄 page 169).
69
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and blinking exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
2½ minutes.
Activating
왘
Press and hold button 1 for at least one
second.
Deactivating
왘
Press button 1 again
or
왘
1 Â button
70
Insert key in the starter switch.
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
Warning!
G
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
앫
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and the ESP is
only achieved with winter tires (M+S
tires), or snow chains as required.
The ABS, BAS and ESP cannot reduce this
risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
ABS
Warning!
G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The ABS regulates the brake pressure so
that the wheels do not lock during braking.
This allows you to maintain the ability to
steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady
pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.
71
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pressure. The
pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.
i
To alert following vehicles to slippery
road conditions you discover, operate
your hazard warning flashers as appropriate.
72
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ABS control
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you turn the key in
the starter switch to position 2 or press
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice.
It goes out when the engine is running.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 265).
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance. Apply
continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
Warning!
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 273).
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle's traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes when the ESP is engaged.
The warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster lights up when you turn the key in
the starter switch to position 2 or press
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice.
It goes out when the engine is running.
73
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
ESP warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible
앫
While driving ease up on the accelerator
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
74
Warning!
G
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
i
Distronic* is switched off when ESP is
activated.
!
Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off (key in
starter switch position 0 or 1) when
앫
the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer
앫
the vehicle is being towed with the
front/rear axle raised.
Active braking action through the ESP
may otherwise seriously damage the
brake system.
The ESP will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size (컄 page 331).
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 264).
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The switch is located on the center console.
Switching off the ESP
Warning!
To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have the drive wheels
spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
grip such as:
앫
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP switched
off. This may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
앫
!
starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains
sand or gravel
i
Distronic* cannot be activated when
ESP has been deactivated.
Warning!
1 ESP off/on
왘
Press the ESP switch 1 until the ESP
warning lamp v in the speedometer
lights up.
ESP is deactivated.
If one or more wheels are spinning, the
ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes, regardless of the speed.
Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
even when ESP is deactivated.
G
When the ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
Switching on the ESP
왘
Press the ESP switch 1.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster goes out. You are now
again in normal driving mode.
ESP always operates when you are braking, even when it has been deactivated.
75
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Activating
앫
With the SmartKey: Removing the key
from the starter switch activates the
immobilizer.
앫
With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the engine by means of the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button on the gear selector
lever activates the immobilizer.
76
Deactivating
앫
With the SmartKey: Inserting the key in
the starter switch deactivates the immobilizer.
앫
With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the engine by means of the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button on the gear selector
lever deactivates the immobilizer.
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
앫
a door
앫
the trunk
앫
the hood
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
앫
the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated,
and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.
Arming the alarm system
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the remote control or
KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps blink
three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated. The indicator lamp in the
central locking switch will blink after approximately 10 seconds when the alarm
system is completely armed (컄 page 95).
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the remote control or KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal
lamps blink once to indicate that the alarm
system is deactivated.
i
If the turn signal lamps do not blink
three times one of the following elements may not be properly closed:
앫
a door
앫
the trunk lid
앫
the hood
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm:
With the SmartKey
왘
Insert the key in the starter switch.
or
왘
Press the Œ or ‹ button.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Grasp the outside door handle.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button.
77
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
i
Disarming tow-away alarm
i
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on
a surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
if the ignition is turned on.
The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated,
and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.
Arming tow-away alarm
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed after about
30 seconds.
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms
automatically.
78
왘
Press switch 2.
Indicator lamp 1 in the switch lights up
briefly.
왘
Exit vehicle and lock your vehicle with
the key or (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) the lock button at each
door handle.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again.
1 Indicator lamp
2 Tow-away alarm off switch
The switch is located on the center console.
왘
Turn off the ignition and remove the
key.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
79
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.
Information on locking and unlocking can
be found in the “Getting started” section
on (컄 page 30) and (컄 page 49).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys with remote controls and a removable mechanical key. The locking tabs
for the mechanical key portion of the two
SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
80
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk
앫
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote controls
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 70)
i
You can also open and close the power
windows (컄 page 171) and sliding/
pop-up roof using the SmartKey
(컄 page 174).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
!
Global locking
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the key to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
왘
Global unlocking
왘
Press button Œ.
Selective setting
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the key so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
The anti-theft alarm system is switched
off. If it is dark, the locator lighting
switches on.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
앫
neither door nor trunk is opened
앫
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
앫
Press button ‹.
All turn signal lamps blink three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
The anti-theft alarm system is activated.
Factory setting
the central locking switch is not activated
왘
Global locking
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 5 blinks twice.
The key will then function as follows:
왘
Press button ‹.
Restoring to factory setting
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about six seconds
until battery check lamp 5 blinks twice.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. It is possible for children to open a
locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘
Press button Πonce.
Global unlocking
왘
Press button Πtwice.
81
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
!
!
i
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the key, then either the
batteries in the SmartKey are discharged or the key is malfunctioning.
If battery check lamp 5 does not light
up briefly during check, then the key
batteries are discharged.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked with the SmartKey, the trunk lid
will lock automatically after closing it.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 299).
The turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
앫
Check the batteries in the key and
replace them if necessary
(컄 page 299).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the trunk was previously separately
locked (컄 page 90), the trunk lid will remain locked.
or
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors (컄 page 297) and trunk
(컄 page 298) as required. Lock the
vehicle using the mechanical key
(컄 page 298).
If the key is malfunctioning, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Checking the batteries
왘
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 lights up briefly
to indicate that the key batteries are in
order.
82
Unlocking the trunk lid
You can unlock the trunk separately.
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
A minimum height clearance of 6.1 ft
(1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
왘
Press and hold button Š until trunk
unlocks.
!
The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
왘
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘
If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
KEYLESS-GO card*
Specially equipped vehicles come with two
KEYLESS-GO cards. On these vehicles, the
validity of the KEYLESS-GO card is
checked every time you grasp a door
handle.
If the card is valid, your vehicle unlocks
앫
the doors
앫
the trunk lid
앫
the fuel filler flap
Warning!
앫
!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the KEYLESS-GO card to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
앫
Always carry the KEYLESS-GO card
with you.
앫
Never store the KEYLESS-GO card together with:
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO card with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
앫
Electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another KEYLESS-GO card
앫
Metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Always take an electronic SmartKey
with you in case of a malfunction of the
KEYLESS-GO system.
앫
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the card
must be located outside the vehicle
within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of a
door or the trunk lid.
앫
The KEYLESS-GO card must be located in the vehicle.
앫
All the doors must be closed.
앫
If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you
can only turn it off again with this button, even if you have put the key in the
starter switch in the meantime.
앫
This does not apply if, after starting, the
selector lever is still in position P. The
key will then have priority over the card
and the vehicle’s electrical system will
operate according to the position of
the key in the starter switch, even stopping the engine.
앫
If the KEYLESS-GO card is positioned
farther away from the vehicle (e.g. inside clothing or briefcase) and can no
longer be recognized by the system,
the vehicle cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO system.
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
앫
In order to start the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO card:
83
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫
If the KEYLESS-GO card is removed
from the vehicle while the ignition is
switched on (e.g. if passenger exits the
vehicle with the card), the message
CHIP CARD NOT RECOGNIZED! will appear in the multifunction display.
Find the card or change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
pocket).
앫
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘
Grasp the door handle.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor trunk is opened.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the KEYLESS-GO card so that
grasping a door handle only unlocks the
driver’s door, interior lockable storage
compartments and the fuel filler flap.
i
The vehicle could inadvertently unlock
if the KEYLESS-GO card is within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the vehicle and
Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a KEYLESS-GO
card that is left inside the vehicle. If you
leave the card behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, the message CHIP
CARD DETECTED IN VEHICLE! will appear in the multifunction display.
앫
the door handle is splashed with
water, or
앫
you attempt to clean the door
handle.
Global locking
왘
84
Individual setting
Press lock button at door handle
(컄 page 52) or trunk (컄 page 86) and
(컄 page 93).
1 Programming button
2 “Driver’s door” symbol
3 “Global unlock” symbol
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Press and hold the programming
button 1 until the “Driver’s door”
symbol 2 lights up.
The KEYLESS-GO card will then function as follows:
Unlocking the driver’s door
왘
Grasp the driver’s door handle.
Global unlocking
왘
!
Checking the batteries
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle
with the KEYLESS-GO card, then either
the batteries of the KEYLESS-GO card
are discharged or the KEYLESS-GO
card is malfunctioning or the vehicle
battery is drained.
왘
앫
Grasp the door handle on the passenger side.
or
Global locking
왘
Press lock button at door handle or
trunk.
Restoring to factory setting
왘
Press and hold the programming
button 1 until the “Global unlock”
symbol 3 lights up.
Check the batteries of the
KEYLESS-GO card (컄 page 85) and
replace them if necessary
(컄 page 299).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors (컄 page 297) and trunk
(컄 page 298) as required. Lock the
vehicle using the mechanical key
(컄 page 298).
Briefly press the programming
button 1.
The KEYLESS-GO card batteries are in
order if the indicator lamp for either the
“Driver’s door” 2 or “Global unlock” 3
comes on red or green.
!
If the symbols 2 or 3 do not light up
during the check, then the batteries of
the KEYLESS-GO card are discharged.
앫
Change the batteries (컄 page 299).
You can obtain the batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If your KEYLESS-GO card is malfunctioning, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
85
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking vehicle lock status
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot remember whether you have
locked the vehicle, you can check the lock
status using the KEYLESS-GO card.
왘
The indicator lamp for “Driver’s door” 2
or “Global unlock” 3 lights up in red or
green.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
Vehicle lock status:
Vehicle is locked
Green Vehicle is unlocked
1 Trunk lock button
왘
i
When the vehicle is unlocked and the
anti-theft alarm system is switched off,
the turn signals illuminate briefly. If it is
dark, the locator lighting also switches
on (컄 page 137).
When the vehicle is locked and the anti-theft alarm system is activated, the
the turn signals flash three times.
86
G
When closing the windows and the sliding/
pop-up roof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
Briefly press programming button 1.
Red
Warning!
Press the lock button at door
(컄 page 52) or trunk 1.
Closing the side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof
왘
Press and hold lock button at door
(컄 page 52) until the side windows and
the sliding/pop-up roof are closed.
앫
Release the lock button.
앫
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long
as the door handle is held but the door
not opened.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking the trunk lid
Loss of the KEYLESS-GO card
The trunk lid lock is located in the rear license plate recess.
If you lose your KEYLESS-GO card, you
should do the following:
A minimum height clearance of 6.1 ft
(1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
왘
Have the KEYLESS-GO card deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘
Report the loss immediately to your car
insurance company.
왘
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
왘
Press trunk lid lock 1 (컄 page 89)
!
The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically after closing it. The turn signal will
flash three times to confirm locking.
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a KEYLESS-GO card is recognized
in the area of the rear shelf or inside
the trunk.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘
Pull on door handle 2.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk lid from the inside
i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the
SmartKey, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫
앫
You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary.
A minimum height clearance of 6.1 ft
(1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The switch is located on the driver’s door.
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
i
88
Pull remote trunk lid release switch 2.
The trunk opens. The indicator lamp 1
comes on. It remains lit until you close
the trunk again.
!
The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
The trunk can also be opened from the inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (컄 page 89).
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
If you open a door, the side windows on
that side of the vehicle will lower slightly. The windows close again when you
close the door.
왘
1 Indicator lamp
2 Remote trunk lid release switch
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
The trunk lid lock is located in the rear license plate recess.
The trunk can also be opened from the inside of the trunk in an emergency, see
“Trunk lid emergency release”
(컄 page 89).
A minimum height clearance of 6.1 ft
(1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
Trunk lid emergency release
Opening the trunk lid from the outside
왘
Briefly press the emergency release
button.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
opens.
!
The emergency release button does
not open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.
i
왘
Press trunk lid lock 1.
The trunk lid swings open. Always make
sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
i
The emergency release button is located in
the trunk lid.
Illumination of the emergency release button:
앫
The button will blink for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.
앫
The button will blink for 60 minutes after closing the trunk.
The vehicle must be unlocked.
If the emergency release button is
pressed and the vehicle was centrally
locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
the alarm will sound as the trunk lid
opens.
To cancel the alarm, insert the key in
the starter switch or press button Œ
or ‹ on the key.
89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk lid
Warning!
i
G
To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do
not place the key in the trunk.
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Warning!
1 Handle
왘
Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
handle 1.
왘
Push the trunk lid closed from the outside with hands placed flat on trunk lid.
G
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
trunk lid will open automatically if a
KEYLESS-GO card is recognized in the
area of the rear shelf or inside the
trunk.
Separately locking the trunk
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
The power closing assist automatically
ensures that the lid is pulled completely closed (컄 page 94).
1 Locked
2 Unlocked
왘
90
Close the trunk lid.
컄컄
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 297).
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock.
왘
Turn the key completely to the right to
position 1.
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
Trunk lid opening/closing system*
!
You can open or close the trunk lid from
the inside if the vehicle is stationary.
The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 6.1 ft
(1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
i
i
If the trunk lid does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 91).
You can only cancel the separate trunk
locking mode by means of the mechanical key.
The trunk can also be opened from the inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (컄 page 89).
You can stop the opening procedure as follows:
Separately unlocking the trunk
왘
The vehicle must be unlocked.
Opening from the inside
Turn the key completely to the left to
position 2.
You can now open the trunk.
왘
1 Indicator lamp
2 Remote trunk lid switch
왘
Press the remote trunk lid switch 2.
The trunk lid stops moving.
Pull remote trunk lid switch 2.
The trunk opens. The indicator lamp 1
comes on. It remains lit until you close
the trunk again.
91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing from the outside
Closing from the inside
왘
Press the remote control switch 2 until
the indicator lamp in the switch goes
out and the trunk lid is closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘
Release remote trunk lid switch 2.
Warning!
G
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
the door mounted switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to ensure that no
one is in danger of being injured.
To interrupt the closing procedure, release
the door mounted remote trunk lid switch.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high) in the upper motion
sequence, the closing procedure is
stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
92
1 Trunk lid closing switch
왘
Press the trunk lid closing switch 1
briefly.
The trunk lid closes automatically.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high) in the upper motion
sequence, the closing procedure is
stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the remote trunk lid switch (on driver's door control panel), the trunk lid closing
switch 1 or the Š button on the SmartKey.
!
Do not place the key in the open trunk.
You may lock yourself out.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
trunk lid will open automatically if a
KEYLESS-GO card is recognized in the
area of the rear shelf or inside the
trunk.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing and locking the trunk lid with
KEYLESS-GO*
On vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
system and KEYLESS-GO, you can close
the trunk lid and lock the vehicle simultaneously.
i
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk lid will open automatically if a KEYLESS-GO card is recognized
in the area of the rear shelf or inside
the trunk.
Warning!
1 Trunk lid closing switch
2 KEYLESS-GO switch
왘
Make sure that you have the SmartKey
and the KEYLESS-GO card with you.
왘
Press switch 2 in the trunk lid.
The trunk lid closes automatically and
the vehicle is locked. The turn signals
flash three times to confirm locking.
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
ensure that no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the trunk lid closing switch 1 in the
trunk lid, the Š button on the SmartKey
or the remote trunk lid switch (on driver's
door control panel).
Limiting opening height of trunk lid
The trunk lid opening height can be limited
when transporting goods on a roof rack
(e.g. presence of an MB sport luggage container). When activated, the trunk lid opens
to approximately the height of the roof
edge.
왘
With the trunk lid closed, press the remote trunk lid switch and hold for at
least five seconds (컄 page 91).
Depending on its previous status, the
opening height restriction is then
switched on or off.
i
If the trunk lid comes into contact with
an object while closing (e.g. luggage
that has been piled too high), the closing procedure is stopped and the trunk
re-opens slightly.
The closing procedure can be stopped
at anytime by once again pressing the
trunk lid closing switch in the trunk lid
or the remote control switch in the driver’s door or the Š button on the
SmartKey.
93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Power closing assist for doors and
trunk lid
Power closing assist for doors
왘
Press the doors gently past the initial
engage position into the lock.
The doors close automatically.
Power closing assist for trunk lid
왘
Press the trunk lid gently into its lock.
The trunk closes automatically.
It is not necessary to slam the door or
trunk lid closed. A pneumatic power-assisted mechanism draws doors and trunk
lid closed quietly and automatically once
the door or trunk lid has been latched.
When the pneumatic power-assist and
mechanism has stopped, doors and/or
trunk can be re-opened.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
or trunk opening when closing a door or the
trunk lid. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
The pneumatic power closing assist mechanism cannot be stopped once it has been
engaged.
To prevent personal injury, never activate
the closing assist mechanism by tampering
with the door or trunk lid latch.
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk automatically lock
when the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
94
i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You
could therefore lock yourself out when
the vehicle
앫
is pushed
앫
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking
using the control system (컄 page 139).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk from inside using the central locking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if
you want to lock the vehicle before starting
to drive.
The switches are located in the center console.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch:
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked with the SmartKey or the
KEYLESS-GO* card it will not unlock
using the central locking switch.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking switch.
Warning!
i
Central locking/unlocking switches
앫
While in the global remote control
mode, the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from
the inside.
앫
While in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened
from inside is unlocked.
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
Locking
왘
Press central locking switch 1.
If both doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
왘
Press central unlocking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
95
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 34).
왘
Lumbar support
왘
You can adjust the contour of the seat’s
lumbar support to best support your back.
Easy-entry/exit feature
The thumbwheels for the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat are on the inner side of
the seat.
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards and
the driver’s seat moves to the rear.
When the SmartKey is inserted in the starter switch or you have pressed the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once and
the driver’s door is closed, the steering
wheel and the driver’s seat return to their
last set positions.
G
You must make sure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel and driver’s seat when the
easy-entry/exit feature is activated, the
driver’s door is being opened, and the engine is turned off or the SmartKey removed
from the starter switch. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Set the lumbar support between 0
and 5.
This allows easier entry into and exit from
the vehicle when the driver’s door is
opened. However, the engine must be
turned off.
1 Thumbwheel
Warning!
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
should light up.
You can activate the following functions:
앫
Steering column:
Only the steering column is adjusted.
앫
Steering column and seat:
Both the steering column and the seat
are adjusted.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be
switched on or off in the in the settings
menu of the control system (컄 page 140).
96
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraints
Front seat head restraints
Information on head restraint adjustment
can be found in the “Getting started” section (컄 page 36).
Warning!
Warning!
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Removing front head restraints
왘
Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
the head restraint is fully extended.
왘
Pull out head restraint.
Installing front head restraints:
i
Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for
easier removal and installation of the
head restraints.
G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
G
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level.
Rear seat head restraints
왘
Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
about five seconds.
왘
Push the head restraint down until it
engages.
왘
Adjust head restraint to desired position (컄 page 35).
i
You can adjust the angle manually by
pulling or pushing the head restraints
by hand.
Folding rear head restraints back
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
should light up.
컄컄
97
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraint tilt
앫
on the rear center console:
The rear head restraint angle can be adjusted manually.
Power head restraints, rear*
You can fold the rear head restraints backward or upright using the head restraint
folding switch. The switch is located:
왘
Press switch 1.
The rear head restraints will fold backward.
앫
on the front center console:
왘
Pull the rear head restraint upright until
it locks into position.
!
Make sure that the head restraints engage when adjusting them manually.
Otherwise, their protective function
cannot be assured.
98
왘
All the lamps in the instrument cluster should light up
Placing rear head restraints upright
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched
on.
왘
Press switch 1 briefly.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster should light up
왘
The rear head restraints will fold
backward.
왘
Press switch 1 and hold.
The rear head restraints will fold upright.
Make sure the ignition is switched
on.
Push upper half 1 of switch.
The rear head restraints will fold upright.
왘
Push lower half 2 of switch.
The rear head restraints will fold
down.
Controls in detail
Seats
Lumbar region support
Multicontour seat*
왘
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the seat backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, seat backrest
cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with regulators on the
right side of the seat after turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button twice.
Press k or j on rocker
switch 4.
This selects the air cushion you wish to
adjust.
왘
Press æ or ç on rocker
switch 4.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
1 Shoulder region support
2 Side bolster adjustment
3 Massage function (PULSE)
4 Lumbar region support
Adjusting the multicontour seat in the order listed above is recommended.
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All lamps in the instrument cluster light
up.
Shoulder region support
왘
Side bolsters adjustment
왘
Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 2.
i
When the engine is turned off, the last
cushion setting is retained in memory,
and the cushion is automatically adjusted to this setting when the engine
is restarted.
Press æ or ç on switch 1.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
99
Controls in detail
Seats
Massage function (PULSE)
Folding forward front seat backrests
You can reduce muscle tension during long
trips by periodically using the massage
function.
왘
왘
To interrupt the procedure, activate the
seat adjustment switch (컄 page 35).
The indicator lamp on button 3 lights
up. The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate and deflate rhythmically.
i
i
Folding seat backrests forward
왘
Lift release lever and fold backrest forward.
The seat will automatically slide forward and the head restraint will move
down.
i
The head restraint is automatically lowered.
100
Lift release lever and fold backrest
back.
The seat and head restraint return to
their previous positions.
Press button 3.
The massage function switches off automatically after approximately eight
minutes. The indicator lamp goes out.
Folding seat backrests to the rear
When moving the seat, be sure that
there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.
Warning!
G
Always ensure that no one can become
trapped or injured when the seat is moving.
In case potential danger exists, the procedure can be interrupted by moving the seat
adjustment switch (컄 page 35) in the door
control panel.
Controls in detail
Seats
Warning!
G
The seat belts provide protection only with
the backrest locked in place and, therefore,
must be locked in place with the vehicle in
motion. Do not drive the vehicle when the
backrest is not locked in place. If the warning message SEAT BACKREST, RIGHT LOCK or SEAT BACKREST, LEFT - LOCK is
displayed in the multifunction display, then
the respective backrest is not engaged in its
lock. Carefully slow down, and drive with
caution to an area which is in a safe distance
from the roadway. Always provide sufficient
room behind the backrest and fold the backrest all the way back until it locks in place.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
The warning message is no longer displayed
as soon as the backrest is locked in place. If
both backrests are locked in place and the
warning message is still displayed, have the
system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
electronic key from the starter switch, take
the KEYLESS-GO* card with you, and lock
your vehicle.
The power seats can also be operated with
the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Never place hands under seat or near any
moving parts during a seat adjustment procedure.
!
The automatic seat slide is provided
with a safety feature.
The automatic process is interrupted, if
the backrest of the sliding seat is
pushed against an occupant or object.
The seat will slide forward and stop.
Investigate and correct the cause of interruption.
Now use memory button (컄 page 105)
or seat adjustment switch (컄 page 35)
to bring seat into desired position.
When folding the backrest forward
from a reclined position, and then folding it back, the backrest stops in a
more upright position for the safety of
any rear-seat passenger. Adjust the
backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering
wheel (컄 page 35).
101
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off seat ventilation
Seat ventilation*
왘
The switch is located on the door. Seat
ventilation can be activated manually with
the electronic key in starter switch position 1 or 2, or by the summer opening feature (컄 page 171). The blue indicator
lamps on the switch show the ventilation
level selected:
Level
i
The seat ventilation is automatically set
to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature (컄 page 171).
1 Seat ventilation switch
3
Three indicator lamps on
2
Two indicator lamps on
1
One indicator lamp on
off
No indicator lamp on
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All lamps in the instrument cluster light
up.
Switching on seat ventilation
왘
Press switch 1.
Three blue indicator lamps above the
switch light up.
왘
102
Press switch 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.
Continue pressing switch 1 until the
desired seat ventilation level is
reached.
!
If one or all of the lamps blink on the
seat ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical
consumers being switched on. The seat
ventilation switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating
Switching on seat heating
왘
Vehicles without seat ventilation*
Press switch 1.
A red indicator lamp above the switch
lights up.
The switch is located on the door.
Switching off seat heating
왘
Press switch 1 again.
i
The seat heating will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.
1 Normal heating
2 Rapid heating
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
Switching off rapid seat heating mode
왘
Press switch 2 again.
!
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heating switch are blinking, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being turned on. The
seat heating switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Rapid seat heating mode
왘
Press switch 2.
Both red indicator lamps above the
switch light up.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only the right-hand indicator
lamp remains lit.
103
Controls in detail
Seats
Vehicles with seat ventilation*
Switching on seat heating
The switch is located on the door. The red
indicator lamps on the switch show the
heating level selected:
왘
Level
2
Two indicator lamps on
1
One indicator lamp on
off
No indicator lamp on
Press switch 1 twice.
A red indicator lamp above the switch
lights up.
Switching off seat heating
왘
Press switch 1 again.
i
The seat heating will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.
Rapid seat heating
왘
Press switch 1 once.
Both indicator lamps above the switch
light up.
i
1 Seat heating switch
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
104
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only the right-hand indicator
lamp remains lit.
Switching off rapid seat heating mode
왘
Press switch position 1 twice.
!
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heating switch are blinking, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers are turned on. The
seat heating switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Controls in detail
Memory function
Memory function
!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be
adjusted for proper height. Also see
“Airbag” section (컄 page 55) for proper
seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the inside and
outside rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
The memory button and stored position
switch are located on the door.
You can store up to three different settings
per SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* card.
The following settings are saved for each
stored position:
앫
Driver’s seat and seat backrest position
앫
Settings for multicontour seat*
앫
Steering wheel position
앫
Inside rear view mirror position
앫
Exterior rear view mirror position
앫
Automatic climate control
These key dependent memory settings can
be deactivated if desired (컄 page 140).
Warning!
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
1, 2, 3
Stored position button
M
Memory button
왘
Make sure that the ignition is switched
on or the relevant door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.
105
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing positions into memory
왘
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
mirrors to the desired position
(컄 page 34).
왘
Press memory button M.
왘
Release memory button M and push
position button 1, 2 or 3 within three
seconds.
All the settings are stored at the selected position.
106
Recalling positions from memory
왘
Press and hold position button 1, 2
or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors have fully moved to the stored
positions.
i
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored positions.
Warning!
G
Do not operate the power seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is in an
extremely reclined position. Doing so could
cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move seat backrest to an upright position.
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
For easier parking you can adjust the passenger exterior rear view mirror so that you
can see the right rear wheel as soon as you
engage reverse gear R.
Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 2 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
왘
Press memory button M.
왘
Within three seconds, press bottom of
adjustment button 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
For information on activating the parking
position, see “Setting parking position for
exterior rear view mirror” (컄 page 142).
i
i
You can store a parking position for the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror for each key or KEYLESS-GO* card.
왘
1 Exterior rear view mirror
2 Adjustment button
M Memory button
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Switch ignition on (if not already on).
왘
Press button 1.
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
107
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see the
“Getting started” section (컄 page 46).
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
M Off
U Automatic headlamp mode
C Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only: When engine is running, the low beams are also
switched on.
If you remove the key and open the
driver’s door while the parking lamps or
low beam headlamps are switched on,
then
앫
a warning sounds
앫
$ appears in the multifunction
display
B Low beam plus parking lamps or
앫
the message TURN OFF LIGHTS! appears in the multifunction display
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
i
high beam headlamps (combination
switch pushed forward).
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
108
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, the
low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
i
i
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch. For exterior lamp
switch, see (컄 page 108).
Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can
not be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position U. To
activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B and pull
the exterior lamp switch to first or second stop (컄 page 110).
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic headlamp mode
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated, the low beam headlamps will
not switch off automatically.
Warning!
G
In automatic headlamp mode, the headlamps will not be automatically switched on
under foggy conditions. To minimize risk to
you and to others, activate headlamps by
turning exterior lamp switch to B.
The driver is responsible for the operation of
the vehicle’s lights at all times. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. Switch on the vehicle lights manually
when driving or when traffic conditions require you to do so.
109
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
왘
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
To activate the daytime running lamp
mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode” (컄 page 136).
When you shift from a driving gear to
position N or P, the low beam switches off
(with a three-minute delay).
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
USA only
The high beam headlamps can also be activated when driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated and exterior
lamp switch in position M.
110
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be
used in conjunction with low beam
headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.
i
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions the parking
lamps will also switch on.
Canada only
i
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
(컄 page 108).
Locator lighting and night security illumination
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system
section under “Setting locator lighting”
(컄 page 136) and “Setting night security illumination” (컄 page 137).
Switching on front fog lamps
왘
Make sure that the low beam headlamps are switched on.
왘
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch lights up.
Switching on rear fog lamp
왘
Make sure that the low beam headlamps are switched on.
왘
Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp switch lights up.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.
High beam flasher
왘
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2.
Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
왘
Hazard warning flasher
All turn signals will blink.
The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the ignition switched on or off. It is
activated automatically when an airbag is
deployed.
i
With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set
for either left or right turn, only the respective left or right turn signal will operate when the key in the starter switch
is in position 1 or 2.
The switch is located on the center console.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
Switching on high beams
왘
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B (컄 page 108).
왘
Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
The high beam symbol A is illuminated on the instrument cluster.
Press the hazard warning flasher
switch.
왘
Press hazard warning flasher switch
again.
i
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
If the hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, press switch 1
twice.
111
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
Automatic control
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
Activating
왘
Press the rocker switch to the center
position 4.
Interior lamps are switched on in darkness, when
1 Left front reading lamp
2 Rear interior lights
3 Right front reading lamp
4 Rocker switch for automatic control
system
112
앫
the vehicle is unlocked
앫
a door is opened
앫
the key is removed from the starter
switch
The interior lamps are switched off after a
set time (컄 page 138).
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after approximately five minutes.
Deactivating
왘
Press the ñ symbol on rocker
switch 4.
The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness, even when you
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
remove the key from the starter
switch
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control
Switching lamps on
왘
Switching lamps off
Press the ñ symbol on rocker
switch 4.
The interior lighting switches off. The
automatic control function is switched
on.
Switching rear interior lights on
왘
왘
Press switch 2.
The rear compartment lighting is
switched on.
Press switch 2.
The rear compartment lighting is
switched off.
Press the ð symbol on rocker
switch 4.
The front interior lighting switches on.
왘
Switching rear interior lights off
Front reading lamps
Switching on
왘
For better orientation in the dark, courtesy
lamps will illuminate the interior of your vehicle as follows:
With parking lamps switched on:
앫
the door entry lamps
앫
the driver and passenger footwells
Press switch 1 or 3.
With key in starter switch position 1:
The corresponding reading lamp is
switched on.
앫
the door entry lamps
앫
the center console
Switching off
왘
Courtesy lighting
Press switch 1 or 3.
The corresponding reading lamp is
switched off.
i
If you turn the key in the starter switch
to position 0 and switch off the exterior
headlamps, the door entry lamps will
remain lit for approximately five minutes.
113
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (컄 page 22).
Instrument cluster illumination
왘
Press the knob 1.
The knob will pop out.
To brighten illumination
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
왘
Turn the knob 1 clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
앫
open a door
앫
turn on the ignition
앫
press the reset button J (컄 page 22)
To dim illumination
앫
switch on the exterior lamps
왘
You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of
the control system (컄 Seite 134).
1 Knob for adjusting instrument cluster
illumination
Use knob 1 to adjust the illumination
brightness for the instrument cluster.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.
114
Turn the knob 1 in the instrument cluster counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge
Warning!
앫
앫
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248° F (120°C),
i.e. close to the red zone of the coolant
temperature gauge.
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248° F
(120°C), i.e. in the red zone of the coolant
temperature gauge. Doing so may cause
serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i
Excessive coolant temperatures trigger
a warning in the multifunction display
(컄 page 278).
Trip odometer
왘
Make sure you are viewing the trip
odometer display.
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the trip odometer appears if it is
not displayed (컄 page 117).
왘
Press and hold the reset button J
(컄 page 22) in the instrument cluster
until the trip odometer is reset.
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
CL 55 AMG
The tachometer of the CL 55 AMG does
not have a red marking denoting excessive
engine speed.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated at
an excessive engine speed.
115
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
116
The temperature sensor is located on the
lower left-hand side of the instrument cluster (컄 page 22). Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to
a thermometer placed next to the sensor,
not by comparison to external displays
(e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the key in the starter switch is turned to
position 1. The control system enables you
to
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.
i
The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player) will appear in English,
regardless of the language selected.
Warning!
G
Multifunction display
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
117
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
1 Multifunction display in the speedometer
Operating the control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume
ç down/to decrease
æ up/to increase
3 Telephone*
í to take a call
ì to end a call
4 Menu systems
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display
118
Controls in detail
Control system
Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
앫
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
앫
If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see
the “Settings menu” section (컄 page 131).
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
119
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
120
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Commands/submenus
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Menu 4
Menu 5
Menu 6
Menu 7
Menu 8
Standard display
AUDIO
Telephone
NAVI
Distronic*
Trip computer
Malfunction
memory
Settings
Call up FSS
Select radio Load phone Activate
station
book
route guidance
Call up settings
Fuel consumption Call up malfunc- Reset to factory
statistics after
tion messages
settings
start
Check tire pres- Operate CD Search for
sure*
player
name in
phone book
Fuel consumption
statistics since
the last reset
Instrument cluster submenu
Check engine oil
level
Call up range
Lighting submenu
Digital speedometer
Vehicle submenu
Convenience
submenu
i
control system displays.
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
121
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
AUDIO menu
You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button k
or j .
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
The following functions are available:
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
display.
Function
Page
Call up FSS
255
Check tire pressure*
248
Check engine oil level
238
Call up digital speedometer
see below
Display digital speedometer
왘
Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the digital speedometer appear in the display.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
122
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Select radio station
122
Operate CD player
123
Select radio station
왘
Turn on the radio. Refer to the separate
COMAND operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the display.
1 Waveband
2 Setting for station selection using
memory
3 Station frequency
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
The type of search depends on the setting for the station tuning
(컄 page 139):
앫
Frequency
앫
Memory
Controls in detail
Control system
i
CD changer operating mode
You can only store new stations using
the designated feature on the radio.
Refer to separate COMAND operating
instructions.
General notes
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
Operate the CD player
왘
왘
CD changer: To select a CD from the
magazine, press a number on the COMAND system key pad located in the
center dashboard.
Should excessively low temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP LOW will appear on the display, but the CD will
continue to play.
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback. Avoid fingerprints
and dust on CDs. Do not write on CDs or
apply any label or other material to them.
1 Current CD,
for CD changer (컄 page 123)
2 Current track
Turn on the radio and select the CD
player. Refer to separate COMAND operating instructions.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the display.
i
Should excessively high temperatures occur while in CD mode, CD TEMP HIGH will
appear on the display and muting will take
place. The unit will then switch back to the
last operating mode used until the temperature has decreased to a safe operating
level.
왘
Use only original CDs. Using copied CDs
may create problems during playback.
123
Controls in detail
Control system
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. No solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. should be
used for cleaning. Replace the CD in its
case after use. Protect CDs from heat and
direct sunlight.
Only use CDs, which bear the label shown
and that conform to the compact disc digital audio standard (IEC 60908).
Use of CDs which do not meet this standard may cause damage to the CD changer. Do not play single-CDs (80 mm) with an
adapter.
For information operating the CD changer
refer to the separate COMAND operating
instructions.
Warning!
The CD changer is a Class 1 laser product.
There is a danger of invisible laser radiation
if the cover is opened or damaged.
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer
does not contain any parts which can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have
any service work which may be necessary
performed only by qualified personnel.
왘
Slide the CD changer door to the right
and press the eject button 3.
왘
The magazine is ejected.
Operational readiness of CD changer
If a CD changer has been installed in the
system, it can be operated from the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard. A loaded magazine must be
installed for CD playing.
1 CD
2 CD changer
3 CD tray
4 CD magazine
왘
Remove the magazine and completely
pull out the CD tray.
왘
Place the CD in the recess of the tray,
label side up.
왘
Push the tray into the magazine in the
direction shown by the arrow.
Loading/unloading the CD magazine
The CD changer is located behind the cover on the left hand side in the trunk.
왘
124
G
Remove the CD changer cover.
Controls in detail
Control system
i
CDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be
played.
왘
Push the magazine into the CD changer
in the direction shown by the arrow and
close the CD changer door.
TEL menu*
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving. For your safety and the
safety of others, we recommend that you
pull over to a safe location and stop before
making or taking a telephone call. If you
choose to use the telephone while driving,
please use the hands-free device and only
use the telephone when weather, road and
traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
왘
Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the TEL menu in the display.
Which messages will appear in the display
field depends on whether your telephone is
switched on or off:
앫
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: TEL OFF.
앫
If the telephone is on:
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the display
reads NO SERVICE.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY is indicated in the display.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘
Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
The standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.
125
Controls in detail
Control system
Answering a call
Ending a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the display you will then see the message:
왘
왘
Press button í .
You have answered the call. In the display you see the length of the call positioned above the number.
i
If you do not wish to accept a call,
press button ì.
Press button ì.
You have ended the call. In the display
you will again see the standby message.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
The stored names are displayed in increasing or decreasing alphabetical order.
Dialing a number from the phone book
i
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
If you press and hold j or k for
longer than one second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
왘
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the display.
Press button j or k .
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
PLEASE WAIT!.
When the message PLEASE WAIT! disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
126
왘
Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing ì.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button í .
Redialing
The system dials the selected phone
number.
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
앫
If connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the display.
왘
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the display.
앫
If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.
The NAVI menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the message NAVI in the
display.
앫
If the navigation system is switched off,
the message NAVI OFF is shown in the
display.
앫
If the navigation system is on, the message NAVI ACTIVE is shown in the display.
Press button í .
In the display you see the first number
in the redial memory.
왘
NAVI menu
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
i
Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system.
If you do not want to use the telephone,
press button ì.
왘
Press button í .
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
127
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic* menu
Use the Distronic menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system.
What information is shown in the display
depends on whether the Distronic system
is active or inactive.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section of this manual (컄 page 179) for instructions on how to activate Distronic.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following two
pictures in the display.
128
Distronic deactivated
Distronic activated
When Distronic is deactivated you will see
the standard display.
When Distronic is activated, DISTRONIC
and the set speed are seen in the display.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Desired distance to vehicle ahead
4 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
5 Your vehicle
1 Distronic activated
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption since last reset
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics after 129
start
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
129
Call up range (distance to empty) 130
Fuel consumption statistics after start
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: AFTER START.
1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average fuel consumption since start
4 Average speed since start
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: AFTER RESET.
i
The AFTER START display will flash until
a distance of approximately 1 mile
(1.6 km) has been covered or two minutes have elapsed since the engine was
restarted. During this period, you can
incorporate the values for the previous
journey by pressing button J in the instrument cluster.
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average fuel consumption since last reset
4 Average speed since last reset
If button J is not pressed, the AFTER
START values are set to “0”.
129
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
Call up range (distance to empty)
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: RANGE.
왘
Press and hold the reset button J
(컄 page 22) in the instrument cluster
until the value is reset to 0.
In the display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank
level.
Malfunction memory menu
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan
malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. The information shown in the display depends on
whether malfunctions have actually occurred.
Warning!
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 270).
130
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the malfunction message
memory in the display.
No malfunction messages
If no malfunctions have occurred, the message in the display is:
NO MALFUNCTION
Malfunctions have occurred
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
the number of malfunctions in the display:
Should any malfunctions occur while driving, the number of malfunctions will reappear in the display when the key in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Settings menu
In the SETTINGS menu there are two functions:
앫
The function TO RESET: R BUTTON FOR
3 SEC., with which you can reset all the
settings to the original factory settings.
앫
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the SETTINGS menu appears in the
display.
i
The message memory will be cleared
when you turn the key in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2. You will then
only see high priority malfunctions
(컄 page 270).
1 Number of malfunctions
왘
Press button k or j .
The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the “Practical
hints” section for malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 270).
131
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting all settings
Submenus in the Settings menu
Resetting the functions of a submenu
You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.
왘
Press button k or j .
For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
왘
In the display you see the collection of
the submenus.
Press the reset button J(컄 page 22)
in the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds.
왘
Move to a function in the submenu.
왘
Press the reset button J (컄 page 22)
in the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button J again to
confirm.
왘
Press the reset button J again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
i
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button J a second time.
Due to safety reasons, resetting all of
the settings while driving will not reset
all of the values in the LIGHTING or the
VEHICLE menu.
132
왘
Press button æ or ç .
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
with the æ button.
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button J again to
confirm.
왘
Press the reset button J again.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
LIGHTING
VEHICLE
Select temperature display
mode
Set daytime running lamp mode Set station selection mode (ra- Set key dependency
(USA only)
dio)
Select speedometer display
mode
Set locator lighting
Select language
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off
Set parking position for exterior
rear view mirrors
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Set fold-in function for exterior
rear view mirrors
Set automatic locking
CONVENIENCE
Activate easy-entry/exit feature
133
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting speedometer display mode
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting temperature display mode
Access the INST. CLUSTER submenu via
the SETTINGS menu. Use the INST. CLUSTER submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings. The following
functions are available:
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INST.
CLUSTER submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INST.
CLUSTER submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: TEMP. INDICATOR.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: DISPLAY VALUES IN.
Function
Page
Select temperature display
mode
135
Select speedometer display
mode
134
Select language
135
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
134
Press æ or ç to set the temperature unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or
degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set speedometer unit to MILES or KM.
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the INST.
CLUSTER submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: TEXT
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
Available languages:
Lighting submenu
Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
available:
앫
German
앫
English
앫
Italian
앫
French
Set daytime running lamp mode 136
(USA only)
앫
Spanish
Set locator lighting
136
Exterior lights delayed shut-off
137
Function
Page
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 138
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT MODE.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
With daytime running lamp mode selected and the exterior lamp switch at
position 0, the following lamps will
come on automatically when the engine is turned on:
앫
Parking lamps and low beam headlamps
앫
License plate lamps (in low ambient
light conditions)
i
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding
lamp(s) will switch on.
왘
Press æ or ç to select manual
or daytime running lamp (constant)
mode. This function is not available in
countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory.
136
For safety reasons, resetting the
LIGHTING submenu to factory settings
(컄 page 132) will not reset the daytime
running lamp mode.
In the display you will then see the message: LIGHTING – CANNOT BE TOTALLY
RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE
DRIVING!.
Setting locator lighting
During darkness, the following lamps will
come on when the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the locator lighting feature is activated and the vehicle is unlocked by remote control:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. It switches off automatically after a period of approximately
40 seconds.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: LOCATOR LIGHTING.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired setting.
The locator lighting will be switched on
or off.
Setting night security illumination
(Exterior lights delayed shut-off)
Use the HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT-OFF
function to set whether and for how long
you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after all doors are
closed. When the delayed shut-off feature
is activated and the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the following lamps will
remain lit after you remove the key from
the starter switch:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
i
You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door.
If you do not open a door after removing the key, the lamps will automatically shut off after 60 seconds.
To select delayed shut-off period:
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT-OFF.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period.
You can select:
앫
0 S, the delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated
앫
15 S, 30 S, 45 S, or 60 S, the delayed shut-off feature is activated
137
Controls in detail
Control system
You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature:
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether and for
how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after the
key is removed from the starter switch.
왘
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key
in the starter switch to position 0.
왘
Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 2 and back to 0.
왘
The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the key in the starter switch.
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: INT. LIGHTING DELAYED
SHUT-OFF.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever
(컄 page 33).
138
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on time period. You can select:
앫
0 S, the delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated.
앫
5 S, 10 S, 15 S, or 20 S, the de-
layed shut-off feature is activated.
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle submenu
왘
Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SETINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu to
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Set station selection mode
(radio)
see
below
Set automatic locking
139
왘
Setting station selection mode
Use the STATION SEARCH USING function
to select the manual or memory station selection mode for the radio (컄 page 122).
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the VEHICLE submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: STATION SEARCH USING.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK.
Press æ or ç to select the desired station selection mode. You can
select:
앫
FREQUENCY
앫
MEMORY selects next stored station
Setting automatic locking
왘
Press æ or ç to switch
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF.
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the VEHICLE submenu.
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Convenience submenu
Setting key dependency
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE submenu to change the settings for a number
of convenience features. The following
functions are available:
Use this function to set whether the memory settings for the seats, the steering
wheel, the mirrors, and the automatic climate control should be stored separately
for each key (컄 page 105).
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature. When
the feature is activated, the steering wheel
and driver’s seat will move back to facilitate exiting when you
Function
Page
왘
Set key dependency
140
Activate easy-entry/exit feature 140
Set parking position for exterior 142
rear view mirrors
Set fold-in function for exterior
rear view mirrors
왘
142
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
140
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to
the CONVENIENCE submenu.
Press æ or ç to set key dependency to ON or OFF.
앫
remove the key from the starter switch
앫
open the driver’s door.
However, the engine must be turned off.
Controls in detail
Control system
Warning!
G
앫
you put the key in the starter switch
앫
press the appropriate stored position
button on the memory switch
(컄 page 105).
You must make sure that no one can become trapped or injured by the moving
steering wheel and the driver’s seat when
the easy-entry/exit feature is in operation
and the driver’s door is being opened or the
key is removed from the starter switch. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i
To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:
왘
왘
After entering the vehicle, the steering
wheel and seat will move into the position
stored in memory when
앫
the driver’s door is closed
왘
Press æ or ç to change the
easy-entry/exit setting.
앫
Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 35)
The following settings are available for the
easy-entry/exit feature:
앫
Move the steering column stalk
(컄 page 37)
OFF
앫
Press the memory switch
(컄 page 105)
The
easy-entry/exit
feature is deactivated.
STEER. COL.
Only the steering
column is moved.
ST. COL + SEAT
Both the steering
column and the
seat are moved.
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to
the CONVENIENCE submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
141
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting parking position for exterior rear
view mirror
Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING
function to select whether the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear is engaged. For additional information see “Setting parking
position for exterior rear view mirror”
(컄 page 142).
왘
왘
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press the j or k button repeatedly until the message FOLD MIRRORS
WHEN LOCKING appears in the display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to switch function
ON or OFF.
Move the selection marker to
the CONVENIENCE submenu using
the æ or ç button.
Setting fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors
Press the j or k button repeatedly until the message MIRROR SETTING
WHEN PARKING appears in the display.
Using this function, you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automatically
folded in when you lock your vehicle
(컄 page 152).
왘
142
왘
Move the selection marker to
the CONVENIENCE submenu using
the æ or ç button.
왘
Press the æ or ç button to
switch the automatic fold-in setting for
the mirrors ON or OFF when the vehicle
is locked.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
Information on driving with an automatic
transmission is found in the “Getting started” section (컄 page 43).
Your transmission adapts its gear shifting
process to your individual driving style by
continually adjusting the shift points up or
down. These shift point adjustments are
performed based on current operating and
driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting
its gear shift program.
i
During the brief warm-up the transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows
the catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫
the selector lever position D with gear
ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄 page 145)
앫
the selected shift program (C/S)
(컄 page 147)
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 148)
앫
the vehicle speed
The current selector lever position and
shift program (C/S) appear in the tachometer display (컄 page 22).
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out
of P or N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
When the selector lever is in position D,
you can influence transmission shifting by:
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
143
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission you
can change the gears manually when the
selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
왘
Briefly press the selector lever to the
left in the D– direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄 page 145).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
144
i
Canceling gear range limit
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the selector lever is moved to the
D– direction, the transmission will not
shift to a lower gear if the engine's
max. speed would be exceeded.
왘
Upshifting
왘
Briefly press the selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Press and hold the selector lever in the
D+ direction until D reappears in the tachometer display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D– direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve
shifting down one or more gears.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the selector lever in position D, you
can limit the transmission’s gear range by
pressing the lever to the left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the
lever to the right (D+).
The selected gear range will appear in the
tachometer display. If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its
rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
Gear
range
Effect
Gear
range
Effect
é
The transmission shifts
through fourth gear only.
ç
The transmission shifts
through second gear only.
è
The transmission shifts
through third gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving
With this selection you can
use the braking effect of the
engine.
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
æ
The transmission operates
only in first gear.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep
or lengthy downgrades.
145
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever position
R
Park position
N
Selector position when the vehicle
is parked. Only place selector lever
in position P when vehicle is
stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when
the vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the
selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle.
The key can only be removed from
the starter switch with the selector
lever in position P. With the key removed the selector lever is locked
in position P.
146
!
Reverse gear
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with selector lever in N
can result in transmission damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Place selector lever in position R only
when vehicle is stopped.
Effect
P
Effect
Neutral
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the
brakes are released, the vehicle can
be moved freely (pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission,
never engage N while driving.
If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning:
Only move selector lever to N if the
vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g.
on icy roads).
D
Drive
The transmission shifts automatically. All five forward gears are available.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle
from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 44).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
Program mode selector switch
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Children could move the selector lever from position P, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
왘
Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until the letter of the
desired shift program appears in the tachometer display (컄 page 22).
Select C for comfort driving:
1 Program mode selector switch
S Sport
For standard driving
C Comfort
For comfort driving
앫
The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫
Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads.
앫
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
앫
The power transmission ratio for selector lever position R changes depending on the program mode
selected (C or S).
!
Never change the program mode when
the selector lever is out of position P.
This could result in a change of driving
characteristics for which you may not
be prepared.
147
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
More throttle
Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘
Ease up on the accelerator when you
have reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
148
Emergency operation (Limp home
mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
Limp-Home Mode (emergency operation).
In this mode, only second gear and reverse
gear can be activated.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Move selector lever to P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Move selector lever to position D (for
second gear) or R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Steering wheel gearshift control
(Speedshift) and manual shift program
CL 55 AMG
To do so, you must first select the manual
shift program M on the program mode selector switch.
The CL 55 AMG can be driven in both the
automatic and manual shift program
modes. In the manual shift program mode
you can change the gears manually on the
steering wheel or by using the selector lever.
!
Never change the program mode when
the selector lever is out of position P. It
could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be
prepared.
Activating steering wheel gearshift
control
왘
3 Program mode selector switch
S Sport
For standard driving
C Comfort
For comfort driving
M Manual
For manual gear shifting
Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until the M for manual
shift program appears in the tachometer display.
Automatic gear shifting is activated.
1 Right button: upshift
2 Left button: downshift
149
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Upshifting
왘
Press the button located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Downshifting
왘
or
왘
Briefly press the selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction.
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. Shift
into reverse gear only when the vehicle is
stopped.
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery surface. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
150
Press the button located on the left
side of the steering wheel.
or
왘
Briefly press the selector lever to the
right in the D- direction.
The transmission shifts to the next lower gear.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. Shift
into reverse gear only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
Deactivating steering wheel gearshift
control
왘
Press the program mode selector
switch repeatedly until the S or C for automatic shift program appears in the
tachometer display.
Automatic gear shifting is activated.
i
At each engine start, the transmission
will go into the last automatic shift program mode selected (S or C). Program
mode M is not stored and will not be recalled when engine is restarted.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers
(컄 page 47) and for setting the rear view
mirrors (컄 page 38) is found in the “Getting started” section.
Rear view mirror
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the inside rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when
앫
the ignition is switched on, and
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the inside rear view mirror.
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫
reverse gear is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
Warning!
G
The automatic antiglare function does not
react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the inside rear view mirror.
The inside rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the rear window sunshade is in raised position.
Glare can endanger you and others.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!
G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
151
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
왘
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
Make sure that the MIRROR SETTING
WHEN PARKING function in the
CONVENIENCE submenu in the control
system, is switched to ON (컄 page 142).
왘
Switch on ignition (if not already on).
왘
Press button 2 for passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.
왘
Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward in the
stored position.
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
왘
Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄 page 107).
152
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
앫
10 seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R
앫
immediately once you exceed a vehicle
speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)
앫
immediately when you press button 1
for driver’s side exterior rear view
mirror
Electrically folding exterior rear view
mirrors
Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in
and out automatically
When the corresponding function in the
control system is activated (컄 page 142):
앫
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold in as soon as the vehicle is
locked from the outside.
앫
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold out as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or passenger
door are subsequently opened.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in
and out manually
Folding in
왘
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
they are not completely folded out.
The mirrors fold in.
!
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
1 Folds the exterior mirrors out
2 Folds the exterior mirrors in
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Briefly press button 2.
!
If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly
pushed forward (hit from the rear), reposition it manually by applying firm
pressure until it snaps back into place.
i
If an exterior mirror is forcibly pushed
rearward (hit from the front) press
button 2 to fold mirrors in, then press
button 1 to fold mirrors out. Do not
force mirror by hand as it may damage
the adjustment mechanism.
If you are driving at more than 9 mph
(15 km/h), you will not be able to fold
the exterior mirrors in.
The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror
normally.
Before you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, fold the exterior
mirrors in, otherwise they may get
damaged.
Folding out
왘
Briefly press button 1.
The mirrors fold out.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
should light up.
153
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Windshield wipers
!
Information on the windshield wipers is
found in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 47).
To prevent the windshield wipers from
being damaged, do not leave the wiper
switch in intermittent setting when the
vehicle is taken to an automatic car
wash or when cleaning the windshield.
i
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front
door is opened.
A rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers depending on how wet
the windshield is.
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Set the wiper switch to position I
(컄 page 47).
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor which monitors the wetness of
the windshield.
154
Headlamp cleaning system
The switch is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield.
1 Headlamp washer switch
i
If intermittent wiping is on and you turn
the key in the steering lock from position 1 to position 2 (컄 page 31) and
keep the key in that position longer
than 2 seconds, the wipe interval will
be set to approx. 5 seconds.
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Press switch 1.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
Document holder
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
You can use the plastic tab of the document holder to hold admission tickets,
parking passes or similar items in place.
Warning!
G
Adjusting the vanity mirror
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
왘
Swing sun visors down when you experience glare.
1 Mounting
2 Mirror cover
3 Mirror lamp
4 Document holder
왘
To use mirror, lift up cover 2.
Mirror lamp 3 lights up.
If sunlight enters through a side window:
왘
Disengage sun visor from mounting 1.
왘
Pivot sun visor to the side.
i
왘
Slide the mirror to the left or to the
right.
Images in the mirror appear in normal
size or larger, depending on the position of the mirror.
If you disengage the sun visor from
mounting 1, mirror lamp 3 will switch
off.
155
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window sunshade
The switch is located in the center console.
Warning!
G
When operating the rear window sunshade,
make sure that there is no danger of anyone
being harmed by the raising or lowering procedure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be immediately reversed by pressing switch 1.
왘
Turn the key to starter switch position
1 or 2. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
press the start/stop button once or
twice.
왘
Press the switch briefly at 1 to raise the
sunshade.
왘
Press the switch briefly at 1 to lower
the sunshade.
Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame.
156
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Automatic climate control
157
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Item
1 Center air vent, left, adjustable
2 Fixed air vent, left
3 Air volume control for left center air
vent
4 Air temperature control for center
air vents
5 Air volume control for right center
air vent
6 Fixed air vent, right
7 Center air vent, right, adjustable
8 Side defroster vent, left and right,
fixed
9 Side air vent, left and right, adjustable
10 Air volume control for side air vents
11 Door air vent, left and right
12 Automatic climate control panel
158
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may
cause burn or frostbite to unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary, change the air flow
using the air distribution controls to direct
the air away from the footwell air vents
(컄 page 161).
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents to the middle position.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Item
1 Windshield defroster
2 Rear window defroster
3 Display
4 Residual engine heat utilization
5 Automatic climate control on/off
6 Air distribution, right
Automatic climate control panel
7 AC cooling on/off
8 Temperature control, right
9 Air volume (automatic, manual)
10 Temperature control, left
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The
system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected
(컄 page 166).
11 Air recirculation
12 Air distribution, left
13 Activated charcoal filter
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
159
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
i
The current climate control settings
(ON/OFF, temperature, air volume, activated charcoal filter, etc.) are stored
for each electronic key before it is removed from the starter switch or when
the vehicle is locked using the
KEYLESS-GO* card (컄 page 105).
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls (컄 page 159)
10 for the left side or 8 for the right side to
separately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compartment.
You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C).
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks
and any other debris.
Do not obstruct air volume by placing
objects on the air volume-through exhaust slots below the rear window.
Increasing/decreasing
왘
Press button 10 or 8 repeatedly up or
down until the display shows the desired temperature.
The automatic climate control system
will accordingly adjust the interior air
temperature.
160
Adjusting the temperature for center
air vents
When outside temperatures are low, you
can manually raise the air temperature for
the center and side air vents. The
thumbwheel 4 is located between the center air vents (컄 page 157).
Automatic temperature control
왘
Turn thumbwheel 4 to A.
The indicator lamp above the thumbwheel lights up. The temperature is automatically adjusted to the set value.
Turning on warm air
왘
Turn thumbwheel 4 in the direction of
the white marking.
Warm air will enter from the center air
vent.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Turning on cooler air
왘
Turn thumbwheel 4 in the direction of
the blue marking.
Adjusting manually
왘
Use the air distribution controls 12 and 6
(컄 page 159) to separately adjust the air
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are
found on the controls:
Symbol
Function
h
Directs air through the center air vents
j
Directs air to the windows
V
Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
k
Directs air to the footwells
왘
The button emerges and the h,
V, j and k symbols become
visible.
Cooler air will enter from the center air
vent.
Adjusting air distribution
Press button U.
Windows fogged on the inside
왘
Turn the marking on the regulator to
the desired symbol.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.
왘
The air will be directed to the vents corresponding to this symbol.
Adjusting automatically
왘
Press button U until it clicks in.
The h, V, j and k symbols are no longer visible. The air distribution is adjusted automatically.
Press button ACOFF to switch on the air
conditioning (컄 page 159).
Press button , to switch off the air
recirculation (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
왘
Adjust left and right air vents 1 and 6
upwards (컄 page 157).
왘
Set blower to the maximum speed.
왘
Increase temperature setting.
왘
Open the side air vents 9 and direct
them onto the side windows
(컄 page 157).
161
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on.
왘
Press on both U buttons until they
click in.
Adjusting manually
Defrosting
Reducing air volume
i
왘
The h, V, j and k symbols are no longer visible.
왘
Press button , to switch off the air
recirculation (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
왘
Set blower to the maximum speed.
Adjusting air volume
Use air volume control 9 (컄 page 159) for
both automatic and manual air volume adjustment.
Adjusting automatically
왘
Press A on air volume switch 9
(컄 page 159).
The display shows “AUTO”. The air volume is adjusted automatically.
162
The display shows the current level.
Increasing air volume
왘
These settings should only be selected
for a short time.
Press switch 9 down until the desired
air volume is reached.
Activating
왘
Press switch 9 up until the desired air
volume is reached.
The display shows the current level.
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the air volume control are set
to U and there is a high need for cooling, the display “AUTO MAXCOOL” appears.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
sliding/pop-up roof are closed).
Press button P (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
Switch off air recirculation, if selected.
왘
Press button , (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
왘
Close center air vents.
왘
Adjust side air vents upwards.
Deactivating
왘
Press button P (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Air recirculation mode
Warning!
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
Activating
왘
Press button , (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
G
Never operate the side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility
of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by
releasing the , button or by pressing
the respective window switch. The closing of
the sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately
halted by releasing the , button or by
moving the sliding/pop-up roof switch in the
overhead control panel in any direction.
i
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically:
앫
at high outside temperatures
앫
if the concentration of carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases beyond a
predetermined level, for example in
a tunnel.
Please note that the charcoal filter
must be activated (컄 page 164) for the
air recirculation mode to be activated
automatically.
If you have turned off the air conditioning (컄 page 166) or the outside
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
air recirculation mode will not switch
on automatically.
i
If you keep button , pressed, the
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof will be closed.
163
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating
왘
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
i
Charcoal filter
Press button , (컄 page 159).
If you keep button , pressed, the
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof will be returned to their previous
position.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
앫
앫
앫
after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F
(5°C)
after five minutes if the air conditioning
is turned off
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F
(5°C)
164
An activated charcoal filter markedly reduces bad odors and removes pollutants
from air entering the passenger compartment.
Activating
왘
Press button e (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
i
If you keep button e pressed, the
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof will be closed.
Warning!
G
Never operate the side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility
of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the e button
or by pressing the respective window
switch. The closing of the sliding/pop-up
roof can be immediately halted by releasing
the e button or by moving the sliding/pop-up roof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction.
Deactivating
왘
Press button e (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
i
If you keep button e pressed, the
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof will be returned to their previous
positions.
The system switches automatically to the
air recirculation mode if the carbon
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX)
concentration of the outside air increases
beyond a predetermined level, for example
in a tunnel.
The automatic air recirculation mode does
not function if ACOFF mode is selected or if
the outside temperature has fallen below
41°F (5°C).
The activated charcoal filter should be
switched off when windows fog up on the
inside, or if the passenger compartment
needs to be quickly heated or cooled
down.
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep battery drain to
a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The defroster is automatically deactivated after
approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature.
Activating
왘
Press button F (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the button lights
up.
Deactivating
왘
Press button F (컄 page 159) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Warning!
G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
!
If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts blinking, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on.
165
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Deactivating the climate control system
Deactivating
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
It is possible to completely deactivate the
automatic climate control system.
왘
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Press button M (컄 page 159).
The display shows “0”
Reactivating
Deactivating
There are several ways to reactivate the
automatic climate control system:
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘
Press one of the following buttons,
M, P, U, a temperature control switch (컄 page 159) or air volume
switch 9 on the climate control panel.
왘
Press button ACOFF (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF lights up.
166
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press ACOFF again (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on the
button ACOFF goes out.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
!
If the ACOFF button on the automatic
climate control panel starts to blink,
this indicates that the air conditioning
is losing refrigerant. The compressor
has turned itself off. The air conditioning cannot be turned on again.
Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
Activating
왘
왘
Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or remove it from the starter
switch.
Press button T (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button T (컄 page 159).
The indicator lamp on button T
goes off.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
i
How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting.
Ventilated storage compartment under
armrest
The storage compartment under the armrest (컄 page 200) can be ventilated when
the automatic air conditioning is switched
on. The switch is located inside the storage
compartment in the front. The air temperature is about the same as that of the center
air vents.
The air volume is dependent on the setting
of:
앫
Air distribution control
앫
Air volume control
앫
Air vents in the dashboard
The air temperature is about the same as
that of the dashboard air vents. It cannot
be regulated separately.
167
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control
Switching ventilation on
왘
Push upper portion of switch.
Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents
Switching ventilation off
왘
Push lower portion of switch.
!
Do not obstruct the air vent in the storage compartment.
1 Left center air vent
2 Right center air vent
3 Thumbwheel for center air vents with
adjustable booster blower
To open center air vents and to adjust the
booster blower:
왘
168
The booster blower allows air volume
speed to the rear passenger compartment to be increased at four different
levels.
The temperature at the air vents for
rear passenger compartment 1 and 2
is the same as at the dashboard center
air vents.
i
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air vent while heating
the passenger compartment.
i
Turn thumbwheel 3.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
side windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the passenger door and on the rear center console.
Additional switches for the rear windows
are located on the rear center console.
1 Left rear window
2 Right rear window
Warning!
1 Left front window
2 Right front window
3 Right rear window
4 Left rear window
G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if switch was pressed past the resistance
point and released, by pressing the respective switch.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pressed the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the window,
the automatic reversal function will stop the
window and open it slightly.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pressing and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by pressing and holding the lock button
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door
handle, the automatic reversal function will
not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from starter switch, take the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
169
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘
Turn key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
Fully opening the windows
왘
Opening the windows
왘
Lightly press switch k to resistance
point.
The window will move downwards until
you release the switch.
Closing the windows
왘
Lightly press switch j to resistance
point.
The window will move upwards until
you release the switch.
If you pull and hold the switch up when
closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some
obstruction including but not limited to
arms, hands, fingers etc., the automatic reversal will not operate.
170
Press switch k past the resistance
point and release.
Fully closing the windows
왘
Press switch j past the point of resistance and release.
!
If the upward movement of the window
is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open
slightly.
Remove the obstruction, press the
switch j again past the resistance
point and release.
If the window still does not close when
there is no obstruction, then hold the
switch j down. The side window
will then close without the obstruction
sensor function.
Warning!
G
Driver's door only:
If within five seconds you again press the
switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal will not function.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Stopping windows
왘
Press respective switch again.
i
You can also open or close the windows using the:
앫
SmartKey, see below
앫
button O in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 159).
앫
button e in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 159).
Opening and closing the windows with
the SmartKey
Opening (Summer opening feature)
왘
The sliding/pop-up roof will also be
opened or closed when you operate the
power windows with the key.
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows or sliding/
pop-up roof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing
procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the remote
control button. To reverse direction of
movement, press Πfor opening or
‹ for closing.
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to open after approximately one
second.
왘
Release the ‹ button to stop procedure.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to close after approximately one
second.
왘
Release the ‹ button to stop procedure.
Make sure that all side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed
before leaving the vehicle.
171
Controls in detail
Power windows
Closing the side windows and sliding /
pop-up roof with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Press and hold lock button at door
(컄 page 52) until the side windows and
the sliding/pop-up roof are closed.
Warning!
G
When closing the windows and the sliding/
pop-up roof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
The windows will not automatically re-open
if blocked during convenience closing.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
SmartKey
앫
Release the ‹ button.
앫
Press and hold the Πbutton until
the windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof open again.
KEYLESS-GO*
172
앫
Release the lock button.
앫
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long
as the door handle is held but the door
not opened.
Synchronizing power windows
The power windows must be resynchronized each time after the battery has been
disconnected:
왘
Push the power window switches until
the side windows are closed and hold
the switches for approximately one
second.
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing the sliding/
pop-up roof
1 Push up to raise roof at rear
2 Pull down to lower roof at rear
3 Push forward to slide roof closed
4 Push back to slide roof open
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card with you, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
With the roof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
roof open, the screen will also retract.
Warning!
G
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make
sure that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up
roof can be immediately halted by releasing
the switch or, if the switch was moved past
the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.
Opening and closing the sliding/
pop-up roof
왘
Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2 or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
왘
To open, close, raise or lower the
sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch
to resistance point in the required direction.
Release the switch when the roof has
reached the required position.
173
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening the sliding/pop-up roof automatically
왘
To select a sunroof opening position,
press the switch to the resistance point
and release it when the sunroof has
reached the required position.
The sliding/pop-up roof now opens to
the position set if the switch is pressed
past the resistance point in the “open”
direction.
Closing the sliding/pop-up roof automatically
왘
i
You can also open or close the sliding/
pop-up roof using the:
앫
SmartKey (컄 page 171)
앫
button O in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 159)
앫
button e in the control panel of
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 159)
Press the switch past the resistance
point in the “close” direction and release.
The sliding/pop-up roof closes completely.
Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof
왘
If the movement of the sliding/pop-up
roof is blocked during the closing procedure, the roof will stop and reopen
slightly.
Move the switch in any direction.
174
!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the sliding/
pop-up roof.
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (컄 page 301).
Opening and closing the sliding/
pop-up roof with the SmartKey
The power windows will also be opened or
closed when you operate the sliding/
pop-up roof with the key.
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows or sliding/
pop-up roof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing
procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be stopped immediately by releasing the remote control button.
To reverse direction of movement,
press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing
왘
Aim transmitter eye at the front door
handle.
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening (Summer opening feature)
왘
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to open after approximately one
second.
왘
Release the ‹ button to stop procedure.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
왘
Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
Closing the side windows and sliding/
pop-up roof with KEYLESS-GO*
(Convenience feature)
왘
Press and hold lock button at door
(컄 page 52) until the side windows and
the sliding/pop-up roof are closed.
Warning!
G
When closing the windows and the sliding/
pop-up roof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to close after approximately one
second.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫
Release the lock button.
Release the ‹ button to stop procedure.
앫
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long
as the door handle is held but the door
not opened.
Make sure that all side windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed
before leaving the vehicle.
Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof
The power sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchronized each time after:
앫
the battery has been disconnected
앫
the sliding/pop-up roof has been
closed manually
앫
the sliding/pop-up roof does not open
smoothly
앫
a malfunction
왘
Press the switch in direction 1
(컄 page 173).
왘
Wait until the sliding/pop-up roof is
raised and hold the switch down for
approx. one second.
175
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
앫
앫
앫
Cruise control and Distronic*, with
which the vehicle can maintain a preset
speed
ABC with vehicle level control systems,
with which you can change vehicle suspension characteristics.
Parktronic system*, which serves as a
parking assistant.
The BAS, ABS and ESP driving systems are
described in the “Safety and Security” section (컄 page 71).
Cruise control
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set any speed
over 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column (컄 page 20).
Warning!
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain at all
times responsible for the vehicle speed and
for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
176
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed to the
vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.
i
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume at previously set speed
Setting current speed
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
Canceling cruise control
!
Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
Cruise control is activated.
177
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed (“Resume”
function)
Warning!
Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it until the desired
speed is reached.
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer
segments from the selected speed to the
vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.
178
i
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently.
The new speed is set.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 4.
The cruise control will resume the last
set speed.
왘
왘
G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
Setting a higher speed
Setting a lower speed
왘
Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it until the desired
speed is reached.
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1.
Slower
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic*
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control
during travel on expressways and other
major roads.
앫
앫
If the Distronic distance sensor detects
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so
that you follow that vehicle at a preset
distance.
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the same
way as cruise control (컄 page 176).
Warning!
G
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does
not react to stationary objects, nor recognize or predict the curvature and lane layout
or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the
vehicle’s braking power.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to traffic and road conditions
and to provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to retain control
of the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed
adjustment reduction capability is intended
to make cruise control more effective and
usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it
is not intended to, nor does it, replace the
need for extreme care. The responsibility for
the vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead, including most importantly
brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests with the driver.
Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account.
Warning!
G
Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
앫
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
앫
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
179
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if
the road, weather and traffic conditions
make it advisable to travel at a steady
speed.
Warning!
G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain,
snow or sleet.
Warning!
G
Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not Distronic is activated.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady
speed.
Distronic will not react to stationary objects
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Switch off Distronic:
앫
when changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
앫
when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫
in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
180
Distronic is designed and intended only to
maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it.
Warning!
G
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer
dial
왘
Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
a collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See warning
note on the next page.
Segments
Set speed
If Distronic is activated, one or two segments light up around the set speed.
i
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the
speed setting on the Distronic system.
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the segments from the speed of the
vehicle ahead to set speed light up.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the red distance warning
lamp l goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is
again established.
컄컄
If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision
앫
the distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster lights up red
앫
an intermittent warning sounds
181
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the Distronic
system calculates that the distance to the
vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current
speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
maintain the preset following distance,
which creates a danger of a collision.
Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum
deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. The warning sound is
intended as a final caution that you have not
interceded with your own braking inputs to
avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do
not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede with your own braking, as
that will result in potentially dangerous
emergency braking which will not always result in an impact being avoided.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the Distronic system.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
182
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
restore the preset distance or to maintain
the speed. The brake pedal is automatically
applied as this happens which results in the
brake pedal moving.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
Distronic menu in the control system
In the Distronic menu you can read the current settings for Distronic. What appears in
the display depends on whether Distronic
and the distance warning function are
turned on or off.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following displays.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic deactivated
Distronic activated
Cruise control lever
If Distronic is deactivated, you can see the
standard display of Distronic in the multifunction display.
If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set
speed in the multifunction display for
about five seconds. If Distronic is
activated, you can see the following display in the multifunction display.
The Distronic system is operated by means
of the cruise control lever.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Desired distance to vehicle ahead
4 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
5 Your vehicle
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column.
1 Distronic activated
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Resume at previously set speed
183
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Distronic
Setting the current speed
You can activate Distronic if
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
lever.
앫
앫
you are driving between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h)
the ESP is activated (컄 page 73)
If Distronic has not been activated after
pressing the cruise control lever you will
see the message --- in the multifunction
display.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
앫
up to two minutes after starting the engine
앫
when you brake
앫
if you have set the parking brake
앫
if the gear selector lever is in
position P, R or N
앫
if the ESP is switched off
184
Distronic is activated and the current
speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i
If you do not take your foot off of the
accelerator completely, the following
message will appear in the multifunction display:
DISTRONIC OVERRIDE.
Distronic will not work to maintain the
distance to slower moving vehicle in
front of you. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accelerator pedal position.
Setting a higher speed
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 183) to increase vehicle speed in increments of
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately
five seconds (컄 page 183), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
light up on the speedometer
(컄 page 181).
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
control will resume the last speed set.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a lower speed
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 183) to
decrease vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately
five seconds (컄 page 183), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
light up on the speedometer
(컄 page 181).
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 183).
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
i
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the rate of deceleration is too low.
G
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 183).
Distronic is set to the last stored
speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
185
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating Distronic
Distronic deactivates automatically when:
There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system:
앫
You set the parking brake.
앫
You drive slower than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
앫
The ESP is active (컄 page 73) or you
deactivate the ESP.
앫
You move the transmission selector lever into position N.
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 183).
or
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
Distronic will be deactivated. The last
speed set will be stored into memory.
i
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display for approximately five seconds: DISTRONIC OFF.
The last stored speed is deleted when
you turn off the engine.
186
A signal will sound. The DISTRONIC OFF
message appears in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
Warning!
G
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of approx. 25 mph
(40 km/h) by operation of the system. At
that time the driver must apply the brakes in
order to reduce vehicle speed further or
bring it to a stop.
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
this time setting and the current speed of
your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set distance will be shown
in the multifunction display field.
The thumbwheel for making the time setting is located on the lower section of the
center console.
Warning!
G
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter following distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘
Turn thumbwheel 2 towards ® .
Distance warning function
1 Distance warning function on/off
switch
2 Thumbwheel for setting distance
When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
the danger of a collision exists:
Increasing distance
앫
Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the vehicle ahead.
앫
왘
Turn thumbwheel 2 towards ¯ .
The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster lights up
An intermittent warning sounds.
If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound stops. The warning sound also
stops when the distance to the vehicle
ahead is sufficient again without applying
the brake pedal. In this case the distance
warning lamp l also extinguishes.
Warning!
G
If the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster lights up while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on the part of the driver is
required.
As required by the traffic situation, apply the
brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by relying on
the distance warning function, as this will result in an emergency braking application.
Especially depending on road surface conditions and driver reaction, this will not always
enable you to avoid a collision.
187
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i
Driving with Distronic
Complex driving situations are not always fully recognized by Distronic. This
could result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations. This will
deactivate the Distronic system.
Activating
왘
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp on the switch lights up.
A loudspeaker symbol appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 183).
Deactivating
왘
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp on the switch goes out.
No loudspeaker symbol appears in the
multifunction display.
188
Warning!
G
Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a distance set by Distronic). This means that:
앫
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes.
앫
While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead
of it, but does not register stationary objects
in the road, e.g.:
앫
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
앫
a disabled vehicle
앫
an oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be on the alert, observe all traffic and intercede as required by
steering or braking the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
road conditions.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grill), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and the message
DISTRONIC - CLEAN SENSOR! SEE OPERATOR'S MAN. appears in the multifunction
display.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic system
sensor” (컄 page 259).
i
Offset driving
If the message DISTRONIC - CLEAN
SENSOR! SEE OPER. MANUAL disappears
during driving and the last speed stored
flashes for approximately five seconds,
the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved;
Distronic is again operational.
Turns and bends
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
189
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Lane changing
Narrow vehicles
Active Body Control (ABC)
The ABC system automatically selects the
optimum suspension tuning and ride
height for your vehicle.
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to:
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane changing vehicle.
Because of their narrow profiles, the vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane have not yet been detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to
the vehicle ahead.
앫
your driving style
앫
road surface conditions
앫
the vehicle loading
앫
your choice of suspension style,
“sporty” or “regular”, which you select
using the ABC switch
The selected suspension style is stored
in memory, even after the key is removed from the starter switch.
190
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Suspension for regular driving
i
The setting for regular driving is selected
when indicator lamp 2 is off.
These height adjustments are so small
that you may not notice any change.
왘
Press ABC switch 1 to change from
sporty driving suspension to regular
suspension.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
1 ABC switch
2 Indicator lamp
왘
Start the engine.
Vehicle level control
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to
앫
reduce fuel consumption
Suspension for sporty driving
앫
increase vehicle safety
The setting for sporty driving is selected
when indicator lamp 2 is illuminated.
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
왘
Press ABC switch 1 to change from
regular suspension to sporty driving
suspension.
앫
With increasing speed, ride height is reduced by up to a maximum of
0.95 inches (24 mm).
앫
With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the selected vehicle
level.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Select the level 1 and 2 settings only when
required by current driving conditions.
Otherwise
앫
fuel consumption may increase
앫
handling may be impaired
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.
191
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary:
Vehicle level when Use for
stationary
Ride height increase
over normal
Automatic lowering
Indicator lamps
(컄 page 192)
Normal level
None
Max. approx. 0.4 in (11 mm)
Both lamps off
Normal operation
Raised level 1
Driving with snow
chains (컄 page 253)
Raised level 2
Very rough road surface Max. 0.95 in (24 mm)1
conditions
1
Max. 0.55 in (14
mm)1
Max. approx. 0.55 in (14 mm) One lamp on
Max. approx. 0.95 in (24 mm) Both lamps on
Dependent on load
The switch and the indicator lamps are located in the upper part of the center console.
왘
Briefly press switch 2 to change from
one level setting to the next. When vehicle is at raised level 2, pressing the
switch will return the vehicle to normal
level.
The message:
ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
VEHICLE RISING!
1 Indicator lamps
2 Vehicle level control switch
192
appears in the multifunction display.
The display switches off when the vehicle is raised.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i
Raised level 1 (see table)
Pressing the switch twice in quick succession will cause the vehicle to immediately raise or lower according to the
starting level.
Speed dependent lowering of vehicle chassis (approximate values)
The selected vehicle level setting remains stored in memory even if the engine is turned off and restarted.
앫
앫
Normal level (see table)
Speed dependent lowering of vehicle chassis (approximate values):
앫
앫
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 40 mph
(65 km/h) – none
between 40 mph (65 km/h) and
87 mph (140 km/h) – lowered progressively by approx. 0.4 in (11 mm).
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 38 mph
(60 km/h) - raised by approx. 0.55 in
(14 mm)
between 38 mph (60 km/h) and
100 mph (160 km/h) - lowered progressively by approx. 0.55 in (14 mm)
Raised level 2 (see table)
Speed dependent lowering of vehicle chassis (approximate values):
앫
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 18 mph
(30 km/h) - raised by approx. 0.95 in
(24 mm)
앫
between 18 mph (30 km/h) and
38 mph (60 km/h) - lowered progressively by approx. 0.4 in (10 mm)
앫
between 38 mph (60 km/h) and
100 mph (160 km/h) – lowered progressively by additional approx. 0.55 in
(14 mm).
Parktronic system* (Parking assist)
Warning!
G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by
the system and can damage the vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
can be affected by dirty sensors, especially
at times of snow and ice, see “Cleaning the
Parktronic system sensors” (컄 page 259).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration.
193
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
the area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition
and release the parking brake. The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds over
11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the
Parktronic system turns on again.
194
1 Sensors in the front bumper
Range of the sensors
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damage the sensors.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Front sensors
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
!
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result.
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the warning lamps light up and
you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is
closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance might no longer be indicated
by the system.
Warning indicators
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
1 Left front area warning indicator
2 Right front area warning indicator
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle. The warning indicators for the
front area are located above the left air
vents 1 and center air vents 2 in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear
area is integrated in the rear trim.
Each warning indicator is divided into six
yellow and two red segments for either
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system
is ready when the border around the indicator is illuminated.
195
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The position of the gear selector lever determines which warning indicators will be
activated.
Selector lever
position
Warning indicator
D
Front area activated
R or N
Rear and front area
activated
P
Neither activated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more segments will light up, depending
on the distance between your vehicle and
the object. When the eighth segment lights
up, you have reached the minimum distance.
앫
Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red segment lights up and a constant acoustic
warning, both lasting a maximum of
three seconds, will sound for the eighth
segment, i.e. the second red segment.
The signal is canceled when the gear
selector lever is placed in position P.
196
앫
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red segment lights up and a constant acoustic
warning, both lasting a maximum of
three seconds, will sound for the eighth
segment, i.e. the second red segment.
The signal is canceled when the gear
selector lever is placed in position D
or P.
The Parktronic switch is located in the upper section of the center console.
Switching the Parktronic system
on/off
You can switch off the Parktronic system
manually.
1 Parktronic on/off
2 Indicator lamp
Switching off the Parktronic system
왘
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Switching on the Parktronic system
왘
Press switch 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Roof rack*
Warning!
Preparing roof rack installation
G
Use only roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.
왘
Open trim at the trim strips in the roof.
왘
Secure the roof rack according to manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
!
Load the roof rack in such a way that
the vehicle cannot be damaged while
driving.
Loading instructions
The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
on the certification tag which can be found
on the left door pillar.
Make sure that
앫
you can fully raise the sliding/
pop-up roof
앫
you can fully open the trunk
197
Controls in detail
Loading
Warning!
G
Cargo tie-down hooks
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
Do not place anything on the rear-window
shelf.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
198
Six hooks are located in the trunk.
왘
Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all hooks with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces
Glove box
Opening the glove box
왘
Warning!
G
The glove box lid opens downward.
i
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
Press button 3.
The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.
Closing the glove box
1 Unlocked position
2 Locked position
3 Glove box lid release
왘
Push lid up to close.
199
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in the glove box
A storage compartment is located in the
cover of the glove box. It can be used to
store check cards, pens, a flashlight, etc.
Storage compartment in front of armrest
Storage compartment below the front
armrest
The buttons are located under the cushion
of the armrest.
The storage compartment below the front
armrest is illuminated with the exterior
lamps switched on.
Opening
1 Storage compartment in glove box
왘
Lightly press the marking on the lid of
storage compartment 1.
The compartment contains a cup holder
(컄 page 202).
왘
The cover opens automatically.
The lid opens upward.
An AUX socket is located in the glove box.
Portable audio devices can be plugged in
here.
200
Lightly touch cover plate 1.
Closing
왘
Lightly push the cover plate 1 up until it
engages in lock.
1 Button to open storage compartment
2 Button to open storage tray
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening storage compartment
!
Closing
The compartment contains a coin holder.
Do not let bank cards, credit cards or
other cards with a magnetic strip come
near the storage tray as a magnet built
into the tray could erase or change the
information on the card.
왘
왘
Press button 1 and lift the armrest.
i
The storage compartment can be heated or cooled.
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat-sensitive objects in the compartment, close the air vent while heating
the passenger compartment.
Slide cover 1 forward.
Storage compartments under the front
seats
Storage compartment between rear
seats
!
1 Lid
2 Buttons
Do not obstruct the air vent in the storage compartment.
Opening storage tray
왘
Press button 2 and lift up the armrest.
Opening
1 Cover
왘
Opening
왘
Slide cover 1 rearward.
Press the buttons 2 together and fold
the lid 1 down.
Closing
왘
Close the lid 1 until both buttons 2 of
lock engage.
201
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in front of seat armrest
Warning!
Folding cup holder out
G
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed
while traveling. Place only containers that fit
into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids
on open containers and do not fill containers
to a height where the contents, especially
hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.
왘
왘
Open the storage compartment in front
of the armrest (컄 page 200).
왘
Push button 1.
The cup holder opens automatically.
202
Push button 2.
The second cup holder folds out in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Folding cup holder in
Cup holder in rear seat armrest
Warning!
왘
왘
Press release button 4 and fold the cup
holder into the storage compartment
until it engages.
왘
Close the storage compartment.
Press the second cup holder in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages.
G
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed
while traveling. Place only containers that fit
into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids
on open containers and do not fill containers
to a height where the contents, especially
hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.
203
Controls in detail
Useful features
Auxiliary cup holder
You can fasten the auxiliary cup holder
onto the left front side of the passenger
seat.
Inserting the auxiliary cup holder
2 Insert
3 Auxiliary cup holder
Opening cup holder
왘
Push front of sliding compartment 1.
왘
The cup holder slides out.
Closing cup holder
왘
Push sliding compartment 1 back until
it engages.
204
1 Cover
왘
Pull up the cover and place it in a
storage compartment.
Press auxiliary cup holder 3 in the direction of the arrow until it snaps in
place.
You can now place a larger container in
the holder. For even larger containers
you can remove insert 2. Make sure
that the container does not press
against the glove box.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
When not in use, remove the auxiliary cup
holder. Place only containers that fit into the
auxiliary cup holder to prevent spills. Use
lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during vehicle
maneuvers.
i
When you move the seat forward, the
auxiliary cup holder turns to the side.
When you move the seat back, turn the
auxiliary cup holder back until it stops
in its original position.
Removing the auxiliary cup holder
왘
Pull the auxiliary cup holder 3
(컄 page 204) up and out of the receptacle and place it in a storage compartment.
왘
Install cover 1 (컄 page 204) on the
opening. Press cover down until it
snaps in place.
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Warning!
G
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown
around inside the vehicle and cause injury to
vehicle occupants.
205
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in trunk
Ashtrays
You can hang a parcel net in the trunk. The
hooks and the parcel net in the trunk can
hold a load of up to 29.8 lbs (13.5 kg).
Center console ashtray
Removing ashtray insert
Warning!
G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N, turn off the engine.
왘
왘
Hang the parcel net on hooks 1 on the
left and right sides of the trunk.
!
The parcel net cannot protect or sufficiently secure goods in the event of an
accident.
Now you have more room to remove
the insert.
Opening ashtray
왘
Briefly touch cover plate.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Prevent vehicle from moving by setting
the parking brake. Move the selector
lever to position N.
왘
Push sliding button 1 to the right.
The ashtray is disengaged and slides
out a short way out.
왘
Remove insert from ashtray frame.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘
206
Install insert by pushing back into
frame until it engages again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear seat ashtray
Cigarette lighter
Warning!
G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Opening ashtray
왘
Pull at top of cover to open ashtray.
1 Cigarette lighter
왘
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
should light up.
Removing ashtray insert
왘
Press latch 1 to disengage ashtray insert and remove it.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘
Install ashtray insert.
왘
Close the ashtray.
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key from the starter switch, take the
KEYLESS-GO* card with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
i
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up
to a maximum 85 W.
207
Controls in detail
Useful features
Heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
The lever is on the lower left-hand side of
the steering wheel.
Switching on
왘
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Warning!
Turn lever in direction of arrow 1.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Switching off
Turn the lever in direction of arrow 3.
The steering wheel heating is turned
off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i
1 Switching on
2 Indicator lamp
3 Switching off
G
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
should light up.
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 2 lights up.
왘
Telephone*
The steering wheel heating does not
turn off automatically.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
208
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
You can take and make telephone calls using the í and ì buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
(컄 page 117).
See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone.
Tele Aid
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
SOS button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
SOS button stays on after turning key
in starter switch to position 2 or pressing KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
twice to position 2 (컄 page 33). The
message TELE AID – NOT ACTIVATED
will be shown in the multifunction display for approx. 10 seconds.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
209
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system
i
System self-check
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The SOS button is located above the interior rear view mirror.
The Tele Aid system consists of three types
of response:
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located below the center armrest cover.
Initially, after turning the key in starter
switch to position 2, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps
in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than
10 seconds or do not come on). The message TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP! appears for approx. 10 seconds in the
multifunction display.
앫
Automatic and manual emergency
앫
Roadside Assistance and
앫
Information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted using the volume control on
the multifunction steering wheel. To raise,
press button æ and to lower, press
button ç .
왘
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
210
Shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call, you will receive a user ID
and password via first call mail. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock, profile
and more.
!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button do not come on during the system self-check or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated constantly in
red and/or the message TELE AID VISIT WORKSHOP! is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check,
a malfunction in the system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically:
앫
앫
following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
or airbags deploy
if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 76) and tow-away alarm
(컄 page 78)
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See below for instructions on
initiating an emergency call manually.
tion display. All information relevant to the
emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID – CALL CONNECTED appears in
the multifunction display. The Response
Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided
they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc-
211
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫
앫
It has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
The relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response center
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the response center.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction
display for approx. 10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
Initiating an emergency call manually
1 SOS button
왘
Briefly press on the cover of the emergency call button with the
inscription SOS above the inside rear
view mirror.
The cover will open.
왘
Press SOS button 1 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 1 will
flash until the emergency call is concluded.
왘
212
Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘
Close cover 1 after the emergency call
is concluded.
Warning!
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Roadside Assistance button •.
왘
Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established the audio
system mutes and the message TELE AID
– ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL CONNECTED
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
앫
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and real
time vehicle data.
213
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds
during the system self-check after turning the key in the starter switch to
position 2 (together with the SOS button and the Information button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 210)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network is not available). The
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display.
214
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the ì button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Information button ¡
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Information button ¡.
왘
Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will
appear in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
system will transmit data generating the
vehicle identification number, model, color
and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the
message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE
appears in the multifunction display. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).
i
The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approx. 10 seconds during the system self-check after turning key in the
starter switch to position 2 (together
with the SOS button and the Roadside
Assistance button •).
Controls in detail
Useful features
See System self-check (컄 page 210)
when the indicator lamp does not light
up in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuously and no voice connection to the Response Center has been established,
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not
available). The message INFO –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
!
Upgrade Signals
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Center and have
the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.
The Tele Aid system processes calls using
the following priority:
앫
Automatic emergency – First priority
앫
Manual emergency – Second priority
앫
Roadside Assistance – Third priority
앫
Information – Fourth priority
Should a higher priority call be initiated
while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard, and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to retransmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is concluded, a beep will be heard and the
appropriate indicator lamp will stop flashing. The COMAND system operation will
resume.
215
Controls in detail
Useful features
!
i
Remote door unlock
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
Canada.
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the audio system or the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected
mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The
optional cellular phone (if installed)
switches off. If it is necessary for you to
use this phone, then the vehicle must
be at a standstill. Disconnect the coiled
cord and place the call. The COMAND
navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use and
spoken commands are only available
by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND display to
indicate that a Tele Aid call is in
progress.
In the event that you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and the reserve key is not handy:
i
The indicator lamp in the corresponding button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by
a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing button ì on the multifunction steering wheel.
216
왘
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘
Then return to your vehicle and press
the trunk lock for a minimum of
20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your Acquaintance Call.
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
i
The remote door unlocking feature is
available if the relevant cellular phone
network is available.
The SOS button will flash and the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of
the door unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt
to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk button was pressed for
more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the
Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pressing the trunk
lock again.
Stolen vehicle tracking services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident report.
왘
Garage door opener
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
objects.
Give this number to the Mercedes-Benz
Response Center along with the password which was issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you.
The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement.
1
Indicator lamp
2, 3, 4
Signal transmitter key
5
Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of vehicle equipment)
217
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
When programming a garage door opener,
the door moves up or down.
When programming or operating the remote
control, make sure there is no possibility of
anyone being injured by the moving door.
i
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
218
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference.
Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control
왘
Turn key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘
Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the device you wish to train
approximately 2 to 5 inches (5 cm to
12 cm) away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the
inside rear view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view.
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously push
the hand-held transmitter button and
the desired integrated remote trunk lid
switch. Do not release the buttons until
completing next step.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘
The indicator lamp on the integrated
remote control will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly. The rapid flashing
lamp indicates successful programming of the new frequency signal.
왘
When the indicator lamp flashes rapidly, release both buttons.
왘
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the above steps.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion of
this text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker and
easier.)
왘
i
If, after several attempts, you do not
successfully program the integrated remote control device to learn the signal
of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door opener could be equipped
with the “rolling code feature”.
Locate training button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to garage door
opener operator’s manual.
왘
You have 30 seconds time to initiate the
following step.
왘
Firmly press and release the programmed integrated remote control
transmit button.
왘
Press and release same button a second time to complete the training process.
Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
왘
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed button on
the integrated remote control transmitter.
Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
219
Controls in detail
Useful features
Canadian programming
Operating the remote control
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop transmitting.
왘
Turn key in starter switch to position 1
or 2.
왘
Select and press the appropriate button to activate the remote controlled
device.
왘
Continue to press and hold the integrated remote control transmitter button (refer to steps two through four in
the “Programming” portion) while you
repeatedly press (“cycle”) your
hand-held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has
been learned.
Upon successful training, the indicator
lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly
after several seconds.
220
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing the remote control memory
왘
Turn key in ignition to position 1 or 2.
왘
Simultaneously hold down the left and
right side buttons for approximately
20 seconds, or until the indicator lamp
blinks rapidly.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Infrared reflecting windshield
Your vehicle is equipped with infrared reflecting glass which reduces the amount of
radiated heat entering the interior through
the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents
the transmission of signals through the
glass by in-vehicle electronic devices
(e.g. electronic toll collection devices).
1 Mounting location for electronic toll
collection devices (infrared transparent)
2 Infrared transparent area
(pass-through for electronic signals)
3 31.5 in (80 cm)
4 19.0 in (48 cm)
5 1.75 in (4.5 cm)
To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle, two infrared transparent areas
(1 and 2) are placed in the windshield.
221
222
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
223
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2⁄3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the selector lever.
앫
Select gear positions 3, 2 or 1 only
when driving at moderate speeds (for
hill driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
224
!
Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
앫
During the first 1000 miles
(1500 km) do not exceed a speed
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫
During this period, avoid engine
speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.
!
All of the above instructions, as may
apply to your vehicle type, also apply
when driving the first 1000 miles
(1500 km) after the engine or the rear
differential has been replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Remove roof rack when not in use.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at regular intervals by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is sharply increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or
allow anyone to drive after drinking or taking
drugs.
Warning!
G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
Power assistance
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.
225
Operation
Driving instructions
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
!
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 73).
226
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so that the air stream can cool
down the brakes faster.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow one drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drive train which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
Parking
!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move selector lever to position P.
In addition, when parking on hills, turn
front wheel towards the curb.
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
227
Operation
Driving instructions
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of inadvertent vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the
vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot firmly on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Move the selector lever to position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the key to starter switch position 0
and remove, or press KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the key or the KEYLESS-GO* card
with you and lock vehicle when leaving.
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Tires
Warning!
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs.
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1⁄16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be replaced.
228
Warning!
G
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
As tread depth approaches 1⁄16 in (1.5 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subject to extreme operating conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high
ambient temperatures).
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires for the winter season for all
four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed snow,
they can reduce your stopping distance in
comparison to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably
greater than when the road is not covered
with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire rating, local speed
limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
CL 500 and CL 600
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
229
Operation
Driving instructions
CL500 (without Sport Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
CL 600 (without Sport Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 188 mph (300 km/h).
Vehicles with Sport Package*
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 188 mph (300 km/h).
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move selector lever to position N. Try to
keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
i
Information on driving with snow
chains (컄 page 253).
CL 55 AMG
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 188 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
Information on tire speed rating for winter
tires (컄 page 252)
230
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
We therefore recommend depressing the
brake pedal periodically when traveling at
length on salt-strewn roads.
This can bring road salt impaired braking
efficiency back to normal. Be very careful
that you carry out these braking maneuvers without endangering any other road
users.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed while observing the
safety rules in the previous paragraph.
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
For more information on winter driving
(컄 page 252).
Standing water
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Passenger compartment
Warning!
G
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is a widely-spread
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
231
Operation
Driving instructions
Control and operation of radio transmitters
Warning!
COMAND, radio and telephone*
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
232
Catalytic converter
Telephones and two-way radios
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet.
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be dealt with promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within legal limits.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments to the engine should therefore
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered
in any way. Moreover, the specified service
jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Service
Booklet.
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive with at least one window
fully open at all times.
233
Operation
Driving instructions
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approx. 248°F
(120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
234
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Warning!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* card
automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler
flap.
왘
Remove the key from the starter
switch.
왘
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
to it until possible pressure is released.
왘
Take off the cap and set it in the recess
on the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
right.
You will hear when the fuel cap is tightened.
왘
왘
왘
왘
Close the fuel filler flap.
i
CL 600: Use only premium unleaded
gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 93 (average of
98 RON/88 MON).
CL 500 and CL 55 AMG: Use only premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
235
Operation
At the gas station
i
Check regularly and before a long trip
Engine oil level
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ? lamp to
illuminate.
More information on engine oil
(컄 page 238).
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 268).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness.More information on replacing light bulbs can be
found in the “Practical hints” section on
(컄 page 302).
1 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
More information on refilling the reservoir (컄 page 244).
2 Brake fluid
More information on brake fluid can be
found in the “Technical data” section
on (컄 page 340).
3 Coolant level
More information on coolant
(컄 page 242).
236
Tire inflation pressure
More information on tire inflate pressure
(컄 page 247).
Opening hood (컄 page 237).
Exterior lamp switch (컄 page 108).
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood
Warning!
왘
G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
Opening
Pull lever 1 towards you in the direction
of the arrow.
왘
Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator
grill.
The hood is unlocked and handle 2 will
extend out of the radiator grill.
왘
Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on
the handle) and then release it.
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height.
Warning!
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The hood lock release lever is located in
the driver’s footwell to the left of the parking brake pedal.
The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
2 Handle for opening the hood
컄컄
1 Hood lock release
237
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
238
Closing
Warning!
Engine oil
G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
왘
왘
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Check to make sure that the hood is
fully closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
Checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
앫
be parked on level ground
앫
be at normal operating temperature
앫
have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking the engine oil level with the
control system
One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the indicator:
You can check the engine oil level on the
multifunction display.
앫
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
OK
앫
ADD 1.0 QT. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
(Canada: 1.0 LITER)
왘
Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 2.
The standard display (컄 page 122) should
appear in the multifunction display.
왘
앫
Press buttonk or j on the
steering wheel until the following message is seen in the multifunction display:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MEASURING NOW
MEASURE. CORRECT
ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL
앫
왘
ADD 1.5 QTS. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
(Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
ADD 2.0 QTS. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
(Canada: 2.0 LITERS)
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding oil see (컄 page 241).
Other display messages
If the key is not turned to position 2 in the
starter switch, the following message will
appear:
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL
SWITCH ON IGNITION!
왘
Switch on the ignition.
If you see the message:
OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD
왘
Wait five minutes before repeating
check procedure.
If you see the message:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
NOT WHEN ENGINE ON!
왘
Turn off the engine. If engine is at normal operating temperature, wait five
minutes before checking oil. If the engine is not yet at normal operating temperature, you must wait 30 minutes
before checking oil.
컄컄
239
Operation
Engine compartment
If there is excessive engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
왘
Have excess oil siphoned.
i
If you want to stop the checking procedure, press the k or j button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Checking the engine oil level with the
oil dipstick (CL 500, CL 55 AMG only)
The engine oil level can be checked by either oil dipstick 1 or via the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 239). The amount of engine oil
needed is shown more precisely on the operating system display.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 237).
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 (컄 page 241).
왘
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
왘
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube, and remove after approximately three seconds to obtain an
accurate reading.
See “Practical hints” (컄 page 281) if the
engine oil level indicator lights up in the
display while the engine is running.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data”
(컄 page 339).
240
1 Oil dipstick
1 Oil dipstick
Operation
Engine compartment
The oil level is acceptable when it leaves a
line between the upper and lower marks of
oil dipstick 1.
Adding engine oil
왘
Unscrew the filler neck cap 1 from filler
neck.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
i
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
Fill quantity between upper and lower
oil dipstick marking level is approximately 2.1 US qt (2.0 l).
!
For adding oil see (컄 page 241).
See “Practical hints” (컄 page 281) if the
engine oil level indicator lights up in the
display while the engine is running.
Excessive oil must be siphoned or
drained off. It could cause damage to
the engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
CL 500, CL 55 AMG
1 Filler neck cap
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data”
(컄 page 339).
왘
Screw the filler neck cap 1 back on the
filler neck.
More information on engine oil can be
found in the “Technical data”
(컄 page 339).
CL 600
1 Filler neck cap
241
Operation
Engine compartment
Transmission fluid level
Coolant
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the automatic transmission.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
Warning!
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
앫
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
앫
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately ½ turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
앫
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
Active Body Control (ABC) fluid level
Regular fluid level check is not required. If
you notice fluid leaks or malfunction messages in the multifunction display, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check
the ABC system.
242
G
Operation
Engine compartment
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
The coolant level is correct if the level
앫
for cold coolant: reaches the black top
part of the reservoir
앫
for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
왘
Add coolant as required.
왘
Replace and tighten cap.
More information on coolant can be found
in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 342).
1 Coolant expansion tank
왘
왘
Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure.
Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
Battery
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the
trunk under the right hand wheel well cover panel (컄 page 313).
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service life. Refer to Service Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
243
Operation
Engine compartment
G
Observe all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
A
flames or sparks away
from battery. Do not smoke.
D Keep
acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
B Battery
with skin, eyes or clothing.
Risk of explosion
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
E
C
F
244
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approx. 7.1 US qt. (6.7 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available pre-mixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze,
depending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing. Failure to do so could result in
damage to the washer system/reservoir.
Operation
Engine compartment
The windshield washer system on this vehicle is heated, so a fluid mixture produced
for temperatures of approximately 14°F
(–10°C) should be sufficient.
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite. You could be seriously
burned.
!
1 Washer fluid reservoir
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 344).
245
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and
winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged
앫
The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed
246
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.
Important guidelines
앫
Use only sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
pressure and correct as required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tires
Direction of rotation
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure that the tires rotate in the direction specified.
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire pressure
앫
Distance driven
Warning!
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of tire rotation.
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire pressure repeatedly drops:
앫
Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
Regularly check your tire pressure at intervals of no more than 14 days.
If the tires are warm, you should only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for current operating conditions.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the specified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
247
Operation
Tires and wheels
i
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the
min. values listed on the fuel filler flap.
Warning!
G
Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Tire pressure changes by approximately
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Tire temperature and tire pressure also increase while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
Check the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation pressure. Spare tires will
age and become worn over time even if
never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary or after a
maximum of six years.
248
Checking tire pressure electronically*
The tire inflation pressure monitor only
functions on wheels that are equipped with
the proper electronic sensors. It monitors
the tire inflation pressure, as selected by
the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure
in one or more of the tires.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display (컄 page 117). The inflation pressures are displayed only after a
few minutes’ travel time.
You can select the unit of measure used for
the tire inflation pressure by changing the
setting in the control system (컄 page 117).
i
Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and
the vehicle’s control system can occur.
The readings issued by the control system are more precise.
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘
Switch on the ignition.
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 118).
왘
Press the k or j button repeatedly until you see the current inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
display.
Warning!
G
The tire inflation pressure monitor does not
indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation
pressure according to the label affixed on
the fuel filler flap.
The tire inflation pressure monitor is not
able to issue a warning due to a sudden loss
of pressure (e.g. tire puncture caused by a
foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle
to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and
avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers.
Warning!
G
Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can result in a sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
i
Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
radios) in or near the vehicle could
cause the tire inflation pressure monitor to malfunction.
249
Operation
Tires and wheels
Activating the tire inflation pressure
monitor
You must activate the tire inflation pressure monitor in the following cases:
앫
If you have changed the tire pressure
앫
If you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫
If you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘
Make sure that the tire pressure is correctly set.
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu appear
in the in the multifunction display
(컄 page 118).
250
왘
Press the k or j button repeatedly until you see the current inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
display
or the following message appears in
the display
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
PRES. DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING A FEW
MINS. REACTIVATE USING R BUTTON
i
If transporting a deflated road wheel or
additional wheel sensors in the vehicle,
the tire inflation pressure monitor
should not be reactivated until the deflated wheel or additional wheel sensors have been removed from the
vehicle. Otherwise, the deflated wheel
or additional sensors could cause the
tire inflation pressure monitor system
to malfunction.
왘
Press the reset button J (컄 page 22).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
CHECK CURRENT TIRE PRES.?
왘
Press the æ button.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display field:
TIRE PRES. MONITOR ACTIVATED
The tire inflation pressure monitor will
now monitor the tire inflation pressure
values of all four tires.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display field:
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
PRES. DISPLAY AFTER DRIVING A FEW
MINS. REACTIVATE USING R BUTTON
This display appears until the individual
inflation pressure values are matched
with the tires. The individual values are
then displayed.
Operation
Tires and wheels
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Rotating wheels
!
Press the ç button.
G
If the following message appears in the
multifunction display field:
Warning!
REACTIVATE TIRE
PRES. MONITOR
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size.
or
TIRE PRES.
CHECK TIRES!
왘
Check the tire inflation pressures and
correct them if necessary.
왘
Reactivate the tire inflation pressure
monitor.
On vehicles with the same wheel size all
around, wheels can be rotated every 3000
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or
sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same direction of tire
rotation must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure. It is
necessary to activate the tire inflation
pressure monitor*.
If your vehicle is equipped with a tire inflation pressure monitor*, there are
electronic components built into the
wheel.
Do not use mounting tools in the area
of the valve as they could damage the
electronic components.
To prevent damage or incorrect installation, have the tires changed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
110 ft.lb. (150 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
251
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a pre-mixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for temperatures below freezing point
(컄 page 343)
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well-charged battery helps to ensure
that the engine can be started even at
low ambient temperatures.
앫
Tire change. We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on all four wheels for
the winter season.
252
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 39°F (4°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and the ESP in winter operation.
For safe handling, ensure that all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
Warning!
G
Winter tires with a tread depth under 0.16 in
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available from your tire dealer or
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning!
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater*
Snow chains
(Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
When using snow chains, the vehicle
should only be driven at vehicle height 1
(컄 page 191).
The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
(컄 page 75) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the vehicle‘s traction.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫
Using snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.
앫
Chains should only be used on the rear
wheels. Follow the manufacturer's
mounting instructions.
앫
Use only snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.
!
Do not use snow chains with tire sizes
245/45 R18 on 8½J x 18 rim and
265/40 R18 in general (컄 page 331).
Do not use snow chains on tires mounted on AMG rims.
253
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Service Booklet at the times called for
by the FSS (Flexible Service System).
Clearing the service indicator
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times/mileage called for by
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
왘
FSS will notify you when your next service
is due.
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):
SERVICE
SERVICE
SERVICE
SERVICE
254
A
A
A
A
IN XXXXX MILES (KM)
IN XXX DAYS
IN X DAY
DUE NOW!
The service indicator is automatically
cleared after 30 seconds. You can also
clear it yourself.
The type of service due is indicated in the
multifunction display:
9
´
Minor service (A)
Major service (B)
i
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
Press the reset button J (컄 page 22)
in the instrument cluster.
Service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display:
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XXXX MILES (KM)
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XXX DAYS
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY X DAY
An acoustic signal will also sound.
The Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the
service indicator following a completed
service.
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the service indicator
왘
Switch on the ignition.
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 117).
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until FSS indicator with the service symbol 9 or
´ and the service deadline appears
in the multifunction display.
Resetting the service indicator
In the event that the service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
service indicator yourself.
왘
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 117).
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the FSS
indicator with the service symbol 9
or ´ and the service deadline appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button J (컄 page 22)
in the instrument cluster for about four
seconds.
i
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the service indicator. To arrive at the true service deadline, you will need to subtract these
days from the days shown in the service indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
Switch on the ignition.
왘
To confirm, hold down the reset button
until you hear a signal.
The service indicator now displays the
reset interval.
i
If the service indicator was inadvertently reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Center
correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing proper service as
called for by the FSS will cause the FSS
to incorrectly determine the next service interval which will result in engine
damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
This message appears in the multifunction display:
SERVICE INTERVAL?
RESET WITH R BUTTON
255
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
Cleaning and care of vehicle
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
Tar, gravel and stone chipping
256
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫
Near the ocean
앫
In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
앫
During winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
Operation
Vehicle care
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet “Vehicle Care Guide“.
Power washer
When using a power washer for cleaning
the vehicle always observe the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a KEYLESS-GO* card is in
close proximity, i.e. within approx. 3 ft.
(approx. 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
!
Paintwork, painted body components
Never use a round nozzle to power
wash tires. The intense jet of water can
result in damage to the tire.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
every 3 to 5 months, depending on climate
and washing detergent used.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors etc.).
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
257
Operation
Vehicle care
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning.
Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
258
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in outside mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a KEYLESS-GO* card is in
close proximity, i.e. within approx. 3 ft.
(approx. 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.
Headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal
lenses
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor
cover
i
Restart the engine after cleaning sensor cover 1.
Cleaning the Parktronic system
sensors
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Wiper blades
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean
cloth and detergent solution.
Warning!
1 Distronic* system sensor cover
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water to clean sensor
cover 1.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a
dry cloth or sponge.
1 Parktronic sensors
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove key from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the wiper
motor might suddenly turn on and cause injury.
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo
with plenty of water.
When using a steam cleaner or power
washer, aim nozzle only briefly from
a minimum distance of 4 in (10 cm) at
sensors 1.
259
Operation
Vehicle care
!
!
Instrument cluster
Fold the windshield wiper arms away
from the windshield in a vertical position only. They could otherwise damage the hood (컄 page 237).
Fold the windshield wiper arms away
from the windshield in a vertical position only. They could otherwise damage the hood (컄 page 237).
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
key in the starter switch.
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
key in the starter switch.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Window cleaning
Light alloy wheels
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass
surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove key from starter switch before cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper
motor might suddenly turn on and cause injury.
260
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.
Follow instructions on container.
i
Use only acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid could lead to corrosion.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Operation
Vehicle care
Headliner
Leather upholstery
Plastic and rubber parts
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
(80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Warning!
G
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
261
262
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Where will I find...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
263
Practical hints
What to do if …?
What to do if …?
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
light up during the bulb self-check when
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2, have it checked and replaced
if necessary.
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The yellow ESP warning lamp
lights up while driving.
The ESP is deactivated.
왘
The yellow ESP warning lamp
flashes while driving.
The ESP or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in
at least one tire.
v
v
Turn the ESP back on (컄 page 75).
Risk of accident!
If the ESP cannot be turned back on, have
the system checked at an authorized
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possiing road, weather and traffic conditions.
ble.
왘
When driving off apply as little throttle
as possible.
왘
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
왘
Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road, weather conditions.
왘
Do not deactivate the ESP. Exceptions: (컄 page 75).
Distronic* is deactivated.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
264
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
l
The red distance indicator lamp You are too close to the vehicle in front of you
lights up while driving.
to maintain selected speed.
왘
Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following distance.
l
The red distance indicator lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
왘
Apply the brakes immediately.
왘
Carefully observe the traffic situation.
You may need to brake or maneuver
to avoid hitting an obstacle.
The yellow ABS malfunction indi- The ABS has detected a malfunction and has
cator lamp comes on while driv- switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also
ing.
switched off (see messages in display).
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the ABS available.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
-
앫
You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle
ahead of you.
앫
The distance warning system has recognized a stationary obstacle on your probable line of travel.
If the ABS control unit control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as Parktronic*, Failure to follow these instructions inDistronic*, the navigation system and the au- creases the risk of an accident.
tomatic transmission can also malfunction.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ABS has switched off.
왘
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.
왘
If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
265
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat
belts.
왘
Fasten your seat belt.
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
<
The red seat belt warning lamp
blinks for a brief period after
starting the engine.
1
The red SRS indicator lamp lights There is a malfunction in the restraint sysup while driving.
tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
Warning!
G
In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not be activated when needed in
an accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
266
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
Except Canada:
;
Canada only:
3
Warning!
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The red brake warning
lamp lights up while
driving and you hear a
warning sound.
You are driving with the parking brake set.
왘
Release the parking brake.
The red brake warning
lamp lights up while
driving.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
왘
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
267
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Problem
?
The yellow “CHECK ENGINE”
malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction in:
왘
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left
area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.
왘
After refuelling start the engine three
or four times in succession.
앫
The fuel management system
앫
The ignition system
앫
The emission control system
앫
Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its Limp-Home Mode (emergency operation).
Your gas tank is empty.
The Limp-Home Mode is canceled. You
do not need to have your vehicle
checked.
The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp lights up while
driving.
268
The fuel level has dropped below the reserve
mark.
왘
The fuel cap not closed tight.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 235).
Check the fuel cap (컄 page 235).
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Lamp in center console
Problem
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp lights up.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
TM
A BabySmart child seat is installed on the
front passenger seat. Therefore the front
passenger airbag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning if there is no
BabySmartTM child seat installed on the front
passenger seat.
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
The system is malfunctioning.
lamp does not light up with a BabySmartTM
child seat properly installed on the front
passenger seat.
왘
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Make sure that there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and
check installation of the child seat.
왘
If the light remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
269
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Messages in the display
The control system shows warning and
malfunction messages in the multifunction
display.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in
the control system (컄 page 130) displays
both cleared and uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button J.
Other messages of high priority or messages of less immediate priority (regular display colors) can be cleared from the
multifunction display using the reset button J.
270
These are then stored in the malfunction
message memory (컄 page 130).
Warning!
G
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
Contact your nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Turning the key in the starter switch to
position 2, or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice to
position 2 causes all lamps as well as
the multifunction display to come on.
Ensure that they are all in working order before starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of all the messages that may
appear in the display.
High priority messages appear on a red
background.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
ABC
ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
DRIVE CAREFULLY!
ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
STOP, CAR TOO LOW!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Possible solution
The capability of the ABC system is restricted. This can impair the handling.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘
Visit a service center as soon as possible.
The vehicle is losing oil.
왘
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
The vehicle is parked on an extremely uneven surface.
왘
Press the vehicle level control button
to select raised level 2 (컄 page 192).
ABC is malfunctioning.
왘
Stop and press the vehicle level control button to select a higher vehicle
level (컄 page 192).
왘
Do not turn steering wheel too far to
avoid damaging the front fenders.
왘
Listen for scraping noises.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘
Visit a service center as soon as possible.
왘
Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
The display for ABC or the ABC system itself is malfunctioning.
271
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
ABC
ABS
VISIT WORKSHOP!
MALFUNCTION!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Possible solution
The capability of the ABC system is restricted.
왘
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘
Visit a service center as soon as possible.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and
has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are
also deactivated.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
272
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause
Possible solution
AIR FILTER
CHANGE CARTRIDGE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The air filter is clogged.
왘
Have the air filter checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
BAS
MALFUNCTION!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The BAS has detected a malfunction and
switched off.
The ESP is switched off, too. The ABS may
still be operational.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The BAS or the BAS display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
273
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
#
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Possible solution
The battery was charged with a battery
charger or jump started.
왘
Have the battery checked at a service station.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
왘
Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
앫
Alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
앫
Broken poly-V-belt
왘
Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability. Considerably
greater brake pedal force is required and
the stopping distance is longer.
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
왘
274
Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause
Possible solution
2
BRAKE WEAR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The brake pads have reached their wear
limit.
왘
Have the brake pads replaced as
soon as possible.
Except Canada:
BRAKE FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP!
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
왘
Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle
and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
;
Canada only:
3
i
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Service Booklet.
Warning!
G
Driving with this message displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately. Don’t add brake fluid
before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
275
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
F
Possible cause
Possible solution
CHIP CARD
CHECK BATTERY
KEYLESS-GO*card batteries are discharged.
왘
Change the batteries (컄 page 299).
CHIP CARD
NOT RECOGNIZED!
KEYLESS-GO*card is not recognized while
the engine is running because
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
왘
Search for the card.
앫
the card is not in the vehicle
앫
there is strong radio-frequency interfer- Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be started
ence
again after it has been stopped.
KEYLESS-GO*card is momentarily not recognized.
276
왘
Change the position of the card in
the vehicle.
왘
Operate the vehicle with the key in
the starter switch if necessary.
CHIP CARD
DETECTED IN VEHICLE
KEYLESS-GO*card left in the vehicle was
recognized while locking the vehicle from
the outside.
왘
Take the card out of the vehicle.
CHIP CARD
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
F
B
Warning!
Possible cause
Possible solution
CHIP CARD
DO NOT FORGET
This display appears (for a maximum of
60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened
with the engine shut off and no key in the
starter switch.
Message is only a reminder.
왘
Insert key in the starter switch.
왘
Take the KEYLESS-GO*card with you
when leaving the vehicle.
COOLANT
CHECK LEVEL!
The coolant level is too low.
왘
Add coolant (컄 page 242).
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Do not drive without a sufficient
amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing
major engine damage.
277
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Ï
Warning!
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
278
Possible cause
Possible solution
The coolant is too hot.
왘
Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
왘
Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
!
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Ï
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
Possible cause
Possible solution
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
왘
Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is intact:
Ï
COOLANT
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.
왘
Do not continue to drive the vehicle
with this message displayed. Doing
so could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
Observe the coolant temperature
display.
왘
Have the fan replaced as soon as
possible.
279
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
G
DISTRONIC
Possible cause
Possible solution
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
EXTERNAL INTERFERENCE
REACTIVATE!
Distronic* is switched off and is temporarily unavailable.
왘
Try activating Distronic* again later.
CLEAN SENSOR!
SEE OPERATOR'S MAN.
Distronic* is switched off because the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
왘
Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille (컄 page 259).
왘
Restart the vehicle.
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Distronic* is malfunctioning or the display
is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
J
DOOR OPEN!
You are attempting to drive with one or
more doors open.
왘
Close the doors.
P
SHIFT
TO P
You have turned off the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
opened the driver’s door.
왘
Place the selector lever in position P.
?
VISIT WORKSHOP!
There may be a malfunction in the:
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
280
앫
Fuel injection system
앫
Ignition system
앫
Exhaust system
앫
Fuel system
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
Possible cause
Possible solution
There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt
as soon as possible.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Add engine oil.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
You have added too much engine oil. There
is a risk of damaging the engine or the catalytic converter.
왘
Have oil siphoned. Observe all legal
requirements with respect to its disposal.
ENGINE OIL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.
왘
Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 238) and add oil as required.
왘
If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
왘
Have the oil checked.
There is water in the oil.
281
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
:
Possible cause
Possible solution
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK LEVEL!
The engine oil level is too low.
왘
Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 238) and add oil as required.
When the ENGINE OIL LEVEL – CHECK LEVEL! message appears while the engine is
running and at operating temperature, the
engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick.
282
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive
to the nearest service station where the
engine oil should be topped to the “full”
mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.
!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
ESP
MALFUNCTION!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Possible solution
The ESP has detected a malfunction and
switched off.
The ABS may still be operational.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
NOT AVAILABLE!
SEE OPER. MANUAL
The ESP was deactivated because the power supply has been interrupted. The ABS is
still operational.
왘
With the vehicle stationary and the
engine running, turn the steering
wheel completely to the left and then
to the right to synchronize the ESP.
If the ESP message does not go out:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
283
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause
Possible solution
A
RESERVE FUEL
The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 235).
Y
I
HOOD OPEN!
You are driving with the hood open.
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 238).
REMOVE KEY!
You have forgotten to remove the key.
왘
Remove the key from the starter
switch.
REPLACE KEY!
VISIT WORKSHOP!
There is no additional code available for
SmartKey.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
왘
Remove the key from the starter
switch.
AUTOM. LIGHT ON
REMOVE KEY!
284
SEAT BACKREST, RIGHT
LOCK!
The driver seat backrest is not engaged.
왘
Fold back and push the seat backrest
until the seat cushion and seat backrest audibly engage into the driving
position.
SEAT BACKREST, LEFT
LOCK!
The passenger seat backrest is not engaged.
왘
Fold back and push the seat backrest
until the seat cushion and seat backrest audibly engage into the driving
position.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
.
LIGHT SENSOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Possible solution
The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.
왘
In the control system, set lamp operation to manual (컄 page 136).
왘
Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch.
BRAKE LIGHT
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp
is permanently on.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The display for the lamps or the system is
malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
TURN OFF LIGHTS!
Lamps have been turned on although the
key in the starter switch is in position 0.
왘
Turn off the lights.
TURN SIG. MIRROR, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear
if all light emitting diodes have stopped
working.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
TURN SIG. MIRROR, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
TURN SIG., LF
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
285
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
.
286
Possible cause
Possible solution
TURN SIG., RF
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
HIGH BEAM, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left high beam flasher lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
HIGH BEAM, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right high beam lamp flasher is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
MARKER LIGHT, FL
CHECK LIGHT!
The front left side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
MARKER LIGHT, FR
CHECK LIGHT!
The front right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FR. L. PARK. LAMP
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left parking lamps are malfunctioning.
A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FR. R. PARK. LAMP
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right parking lamps are malfunctioning.
A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
STANDING LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left standing lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
.
Possible cause
Possible solution
STANDING LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right standing signal lamp is malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
LOW BEAM, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
LOW BEAM, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
3RD BRAKE LIGHT
CHECK LIGHT!
The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
BRAKE LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
BRAKE LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
REVERSE LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
287
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
.
!
288
Possible cause
Possible solution
REVERSE LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
REAR FOGLIGHT
CHECK LIGHT!
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TAIL LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TAIL LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TURN SIG., LR
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TURN SIG., RR
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A back-up bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
PARK. BRAKE
RELEASE BRAKE!
You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
왘
Release the parking brake
(컄 page 44).
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause
Possible solution
The seat belt system is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
왘
Activate the tire inflation pressure
monitor* (컄 page 248).
<
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!
H
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
The tire pressure is being checked.
PRES. DISPLAY AFTER
DRIVING A FEW MINS. REACTIVATE USING R BUTTON
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
REACTIVATE!
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
The tire inflation pressure monitor* is deactivated.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
289
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
H
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
NOT ACTIVE
TIRE PRES. MONITOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Possible cause
Possible solution
The tire inflation pressure monitor* is unable to monitor the tire pressure due to
왘
Check the tire pressure at the next
service station.
왘
Have the tire inflation pressure monitor* checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
왘
Check and correct tire pressure as
required (컄 page 248).
앫
the presence of several wheel sensors
in the vehicle.
앫
excessive wheel sensor temperatures.
앫
a nearby radio interference source.
앫
unrecognized wheel sensors mounted.
The tire inflation pressure monitor* is malfunctioning.
A wheel without proper sensor was installed.
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
290
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
H
TIRE PRES.
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!
Possible solution
One or more tires is rapidly deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
왘
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
low.
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
The right front tire is rapidly deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the minimum value.
TIRE PRES.
CHECK TIRES!
TIRE PRES., RF
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!
The right front tire pressure is low.
TIRE PRES., RF
CHECK TIRES!
Warning!
Possible cause
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
291
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
H
TIRE PRES., LF
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!
TIRE PRES., RR
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!
The left front tire is rapidly deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
The right rear tire is rapidly deflating.
The right rear tire pressure is low.
TIRE PRES., RR
CHECK TIRES!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
292
Possible solution
The left front tire pressure is low.
TIRE PRES., LF
CHECK TIRES!
Warning!
Possible cause
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
H
TIRE PRES., LR
CAUTION, TIRE DEFECT!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Display
L
Possible solution
The left rear tire is rapidly deflating.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
왘
Check the tire pressure.
왘
Change the wheel (컄 page 308).
The left rear tire pressure is low.
TIRE PRES., LR
CHECK TIRES!
Warning!
Possible cause
You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Possible cause
Possible solution
TELE AID MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
One or more main functions of the Tele Aid
system are malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
TELE AID BATTERY
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The emergency power battery for the Tele
Aid system is malfunctioning. If the vehicle
battery is also discharged, Tele Aid will not
be operational.
왘
Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
293
Practical hints
What to do if …?
Display
Possible cause
Possible solution
ì
FUNCTION
NOT AVAILABLE!
This display appears if button ì or í
on the multifunction steering wheel is
pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
Ê
TRUNK OPEN!
This message will appear whenever the
trunk lid is open.
왘
Close the trunk lid.
W
WASHER FLUID
CHECK LEVEL!
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of
total reservoir capacity.
왘
Add washer fluid (컄 page 244).
Î
CRUISE CONTROL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunctioning.
왘
Have cruise control or Distronic*
checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
_
ENTRY POSITION
DO NOT DRIVE!
Seat, mirrors and steering wheel have not
yet moved to their preset driving positions.
왘
Wait until the seat, mirrors and steering wheel have moved to their driving
positions.
The message will disappear.
±
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
VISIT WORKSHOP!
Certain electronic systems are unable to
relay information to the control system.
The following systems may have failed:
왘
Have the electronic systems
checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
294
앫
Coolant temperature display
앫
Tachometer
앫
Cruise control display
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Where will I find...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is stored in the rear center
armrest.
Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage
bowl, spare wheel
!
To prevent damage, always disengage
trunk floor handle from trunk edge and
lower trunk floor before closing the
trunk lid.
The spare wheel, the vehicle tool kit and
the luggage bowl are stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
왘
Fold rear arm rest down 1.
왘
Press handle 1 upwards.
왘
Fold lid 2 up.
왘
Remove first aid kit.
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
1 Vehicle jack
2 Vehicle tool kit
3 Luggage bowl
4 Spare wheel
왘
Lift up the trunk floor cover and engage
trunk floor handle in upper edge of
trunk.
앫
One pair of universal pliers
앫
Two open-end wrenches
앫
One hex-socket wrench
앫
One interchangeable slot/Phillips
screwdriver
앫
One towing eye bolt
앫
One wheel wrench
앫
One alignment bolt
앫
One fuse extractor
앫
One fuse chart for the main fuse box
앫
Spare fuses
You can now remove the tools and accessories.
295
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Vehicle jack
To prepare the vehicle jack for use
왘
Remove the vehicle jack from the spare
wheel well under the trunk floor.
왘
Push the crank handle up.
왘
Turn the crank handle clockwise until it
engages (operational position).
Storing the vehicle jack in the trunk
왘
Retract the vehicle jack arm to the
base of the vehicle jack.
왘
Push the crank handle up.
296
왘
Turn the crank handle counterclockwise to the end of the stop (storage position).
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
Spare wheel
Removing the spare wheel
왘
Take out vehicle tool kit tray 2.
왘
Turn the luggage bowl 3 counterclockwise.
왘
Remove the spare wheel 4.
Storing the spare wheel
왘
Place spare wheel 4 in wheel well and
secure it with luggage bowl 3.
왘
Turn the luggage bowl 3 clockwise to
its stop.
왘
Place vehicle tool kit tray 2 in luggage
bowl 3.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
i
Unlocking the driver’s door
Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:
If you are unable to unlock the driver’s
door using the SmartKey, open the door
using the mechanical key.
왘
Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left (position 1).
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the key in the starter switch.
앫
If KEYLESS-GO* card present,
press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button.
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
왘
Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow and slide the mechanical key out of
the housing.
297
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk
!
Locking the vehicle
If you are unable to unlock the trunk with
the SmartKey, open the trunk with the mechanical key as follows:
The trunk lid swings open automatically. Always make sure that there is sufficient overhead clearance. A minimum
height clearance of 6.1 ft (1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical
key as follows:
왘
Close the passenger door and the trunk
lid.
i
왘
Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:
Press the central locking switch in the
center console (컄 page 95).
왘
Check to see whether the locking knob
on the passenger door is still visible. If
necessary push it down manually.
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
왘
Lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key.
앫
Insert the key in the starter switch.
왘
앫
If KEYLESS-GO* card present,
press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 33).
Lock the trunk lid if necessary with the
mechanical key (컄 page 90).
Trunk lock
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock.
왘
Turn the key counterclockwise to
position 1.
왘
Press trunk lid lock 2.
The trunk lid swings open.
298
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Changing batteries
i
왘
When changing batteries, always replace both batteries.
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* card are discharged, the vehicle
can no longer be locked or unlocked. It is
recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Insert the mechanical key 1 in side
opening and push gray slide 2.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
왘
Pull the battery compartment out of the
key housing in direction of arrow.
왘
Remove the batteries.
SmartKey
Warning!
G
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
Remove mechanical key 1
(컄 page 297).
3 Battery
4 Contact spring
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
batteries 3 under the contact spring 4
with the plus (+) side facing up.
왘
Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place.
299
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
KEYLESS-GO* card
Fuel filler flap
In an emergency, the fuel filler flap can
only be opened from the trunk. The release
knob is located on the right-hand side in
the trunk.
왘
Open the trunk with the mechanical
key (컄 page 298).
왘
Remove the battery cover and the trim
inside the trunk on the right-hand side.
왘
Pull release knob 1 (arrow) flap.
The fuel filler flap can be opened.
1 Battery cover
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
Pry open cover 1 (e.g. by using a narrow blade screw driver).
왘
Remove the batteries.
왘
Install new batteries as indicated by
the “+” and “–” markings in the KEYLESS-GO card.
왘
Replace battery cover 1.
300
1 Release knob
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Sliding/pop-up roof
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located
behind the lens of the interior overhead
light.
왘
Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘
Remove the crank from the Operator’s
Manual pouch.
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up
roof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.
왘
Insert crank 2 through hole.
왘
Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
왘
앫
slide roof closed
앫
raise roof at the rear
Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
앫
slide roof open
앫
lower roof at the rear
The sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchronized after being operated manually
(컄 page 175).
2 Crank
1 Lens
왘
Pry off lens 1 using a srewdriver.
301
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
i
Turn signal lamps
앫
Brake lamps
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
302
1 Additional turn signal lamps
LED
2 Turn signal lamp
1156 A
3 High beam flasher
H7-55 W
4 Side marker lamp
W5W
5 Fog lamp
HB4-55 W
6 Parking and standing lamps
H6W
7 Low beam and high Xenon1
beam
D2S-35 W
Back-up bulbs will be brought into use
when the following lamps malfunction:
앫
Type
1
Bi-Xenon headlamps: For safety reasons (high voltage), do not replace the xenon bulb yourself. See
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps
Lamp
Notes on bulb replacement
Type
8 High mounted brake LED
lamp
9 Brake lamp
10 Tail, parking and
standing lamp
Side marker lamp
11 Backup lamp
LED
Warning!
G
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
P 21/4 W
Bulbs and bulb sockets can get very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
LED
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you
P 21 W
12 License plate lamps C 5 W
13 Rear fog lamp,
driver’s side
P 21/4 W
14 Turn signal lamp
PY 21 W
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
drop the bulb
앫
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon lamps,
it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
앫
Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center:
앫
Additional turn signal lamps in the
exterior rear view mirrors
앫
Bi-Xenon lamps
앫
Front fog lamps
앫
High mounted brake lamp
앫
Brake lamp
앫
Rear side marker
303
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
왘
Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder.
G
왘
From below, press connector 2 with
bulb upward onto the reflector.
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in xenon
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘
Align housing cover 1 and click into
place.
Warning!
Front turn signal bulb
2 Electrical connector for high beam
flasher housing bulb
3 Parking and standing lamp
4 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
5 Low beam and high beam (Bi-Xenon)
housing cover
High beam flasher bulb
1 Housing cover for high beam flasher
bulb, parking and standing lamp
304
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 237).
왘
Press ends of housing cover 1 tab together and remove cover.
왘
Press connector 2 downward.
왘
Remove connector 2 with the bulb.
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 237).
왘
Twist bulb socket 4 counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘
Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
twist clockwise.
왘
Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist
clockwise.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Side marker lamp bulb
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 237).
왘
Press ends of housing cover 1 tab together and remove cover.
왘
Pull out the bulb socket with the bulb.
왘
Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘
Insert a new bulb in the socket.
왘
Reinstall the bulb socket.
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Align housing cover and click into
place.
왘
Carefully slide lamp towards rear.
왘
Remove front end first.
왘
Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘
Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket.
왘
Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
clockwise.
왘
To reinstall lamp, set rear end in
bumper and let front end snap into
place.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies
1 Backup lamp (black socket)
2 Turn signal lamp (white socket)
3 Tail, standing and parking lamp (red
socket)
4 Driver’s side: tail, parking and rear fog
lamp
Passenger’s side: tail and parking lamp
(red socket)
305
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
왘
왘
왘
Switch off the lights.
Open trunk.
왘
Turn lock counterclockwise and move
the trim to the side.
Loosen both screws 1 and remove
lamp.
왘
Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull out.
Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
lamp.
왘
Retighten the screws.
왘
Gently twist bulb counterclockwise and
pull out of bulb holder.
왘
Insert new bulb into the holder and turn
it clockwise.
왘
Reinstall bulb socket.
The bulb socket should audibly click.
왘
Replace trim and secure with lock.
306
License plate lamp
1 Screws
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Replacing wiper blades
!
To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper
arms should only be folded forward
when in the vertical position.
Warning!
G
왘
Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on
the wiper arm.
왘
Rotate wiper blade into position parallel to wiper arm.
왘
Fold the wiper arm forward.
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield.
You should hear it snap into place.
!
For safety reasons, remove key from starter
switch before replacing a wiper blade, otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
왘
Installing
Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Removing
왘
Turn key in starter switch to position 1.
왘
Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 47).
왘
With wiper arm in the vertical position
(see above), turn key in starter switch
to position 0.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
왘
Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
wiper arm (arrow 1).
왘
Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
the retainer in the direction of arrow 2.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
307
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
왘
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘
Engage the steering wheel lock in the
straight ahead position and set the
parking brake.
왘
Move the selector lever to P.
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Mounting the spare wheel
Spare wheel
Spare wheel CL 500 and CL 600 (except
Sport Package*)
The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full
sized tire of the same type as on the vehicle, and it is fully functional.
308
However, that spare wheel rim is weight
optimized and has a limited service life of
12000 miles (20000 km) use before a
standard wheel rim must replace it.
Warning!
G
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use
only. Use for over a total of 12000 miles
(20000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may
cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and possible injuries.
Spare wheel CL 55 AMG and
Sport Package*
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a mounted spare
wheel. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz-Center
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel.
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use
only. Use for over a total of 12000 miles
(20000 km) (aggregate of all uses) may
cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and possible injuries.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 333).
When driving with spare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed
vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz-Center
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel.
Practical hints
Flat tire
More information can be found in the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 333).
왘
Take the two-piece wheel wrench out
of the vehicle tool kit tray. Assemble
wheel wrench.
Preparing the vehicle
왘
Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle
jack out of trunk.
왘
Take the spare wheel out of wheel well
(컄 page 296).
Lifting the vehicle
왘
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable, heavy
objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘
Place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.
When changing wheel on a hill:
왘
Place chocks behind the downhill sides
of both wheels of the axle not being
worked on.
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
왘
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).
The tube openings are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front
of the rear wheel housings.
컄컄
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure that the jack
arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
309
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
Keeping jack in this position, turn
crank 3 clockwise until the jack base
meets the ground. Make sure the jack
is vertical (plumb line).
왘
Continue to turn the crank until the tire
is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Warning!
1 Jack support tube cover
왘
Move cover 1 toward rear by pressing
at point indicated by arrow.
왘
Remove cover 1 carefully to avoid
damage to the locking tabs.
1 Jack arm
2 Jack support tube hole
3 Crank
왘
Insert jack arm 1 fully into tube hole 2
up to the stop.
Warning!
G
Insert the jack arm fully into the jack support tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise the
vehicle may fall from the jack and cause personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
310
G
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
for performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
앫
Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
앫
Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
Mounting the new wheel
왘
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
왘
Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
왘
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
왘
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Warning!
1 Alignment bolt
Warning!
G
왘
Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and remove.
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
왘
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
왘
Remove the remaining bolts.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
왘
Remove the wheel.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
G
Use only genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identified by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts
may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly
tightened mounting bolts can cause the
wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Make sure you are using the correct
mounting bolts.
311
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle
왘
왘
Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.
Remove the jack.
Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 ft lb (150 Nm).
왘
왘
1-5
왘
Wheel bolts
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of
110 ft lb (150 Nm).
312
G
Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
should be fully collapsed, with handle
folded in.
Place the wheel bolt wrench, alignment
bolt and jack back in the vehicle tool kit
in the trunk and close the covering lid.
Replacing jack support tube cover
왘
Slide tongue of cover under the upper
edge of the tube opening.
왘
Applying even pressure, press cover
until it snaps into place. Be careful not
to damage the locking tabs or clamp
the plastic retaining strap.
!
You can also screw the faulty wheel
down into the spare wheel well in the
trunk.
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor* until the depressurized
tire is no longer in the vehicle.
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
!
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running
or the key is in the starter switch. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely
damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Service Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
Warning!
Warning!
G
With a disconnected battery
앫
you will no longer be able to turn the key
in the starter switch and pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button on the
selector lever will have no effect
앫
the selector lever will remain locked in
position P
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
313
Practical hints
Battery
The battery is located in the trunk under
the right hand wheel well cover panel.
1 Battery cover
2 Locking knob
Disconnecting the battery
Removing the battery
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
왘
Depress the parking brake firmly or
move the gear selector lever to position P.
Remove the screw securing the battery.
왘
Remove the battery support and bracket. Take out the battery.
왘
Open the trunk lid (컄 page 88) or
(컄 page 89).
Charging and reinstalling the battery
왘
Turn locking knob 2 and remove battery cover 1.
왘
Detach negative terminal 3 of the battery with the 10 mm open-end wrench
from the vehicle tool kit.
왘
Remove cover 4 from the positive terminal.
왘
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
왘
Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
왘
Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in reverse order.
Warning!
G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
3 Negative terminal
4 Cover over positive terminal
314
Practical hints
Battery
Reconnecting the battery
i
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover 4.
The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnecting):
왘
Connect negative lead 3.
앫
Set the clock. Refer to the separate
COMAND operating instructions.
Never invert the terminal connections.
앫
Resynchronize the ESP
(컄 page 283).
!
앫
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
Resynchronize side windows
(컄 page 172).
앫
Resynchronize sliding/pop-up roof
(컄 page 175).
!
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
315
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
316
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
앫
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
앫
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫
Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫
Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫
Always make sure that the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or
other parts that move when an engine
is started or running.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 243).
Make sure that the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Apply parking brake.
왘
Shift gear selector lever to position P.
왘
Open the trunk lid.
왘
Remove battery cover.
왘
Connect positive terminals 1 and 3 of
the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 3 first.
Connect negative terminals 2 and 4 of
the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 4 first.
왘
Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
You can now turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
왘
The battery is located on the right side of
the trunk under the battery cover
(컄 page 313).
왘
왘
Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 2 and 4 and then
from positive terminals 1 and 3.
You can now turn on the lights.
1 Positive terminal of discharged battery
2 Negative terminal of discharged battery
3 Positive terminal of charged battery
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
왘
Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
!
Never invert the terminal connections.
왘
Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
317
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with key in starter switch turned
to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 78) and the automatic central
locking (컄 page 139).
318
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
necessary to have the vehicle moved to a
safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
(key in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be
engaged and will apply the rear wheel
brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
be in position N and the key must be in
starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50
km/h).
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the transmission, however,
we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange
for any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.
Warning!
G
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the key is in
starter switch position 2.
If the key is left in starter switch position 0
for an extended period of time, it can no
longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
key from starter switch and reinsert.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
319
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i
!
i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
key in starter switch to position 2 and
activate the combination switch for the
left or right turn signal in the usual
manner – only the selected turn signal
will operate.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the following:
The selector lever will remain locked in
position P and the key will not turn in
the starter switch if the battery is disconnected or discharged. See notes on
the battery (컄 page 313) or on jump
starting (컄 page 316).
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
With the automatic central locking activated and the key in starter switch
position 2, or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button in position 2, the vehicle doors
lock if the left front wheel as well as the
right rear wheel are turning at vehicle
speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 78).
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic central locking (컄 page 139).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
320
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
Front of vehicle
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).
왘
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
Reinstalling cover
왘
Fit cover and snap into place.
Removing cover
왘
Pull cover in the direction of the arrow.
왘
Fold cover down to reveal threaded
hole for the towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).
왘
Rear of vehicle
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
Reinstalling cover
왘
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
Fit cover and snap into place.
Removing cover
왘
Press mark on cover in direction of arrow.
왘
Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for
towing eye bolt.
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper
321
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
Your vehicle’s electrical fuses are located
in various fuse boxes:
앫
In the dashboard on the passenger side
앫
In the rear passenger compartment under the right rear seat
앫
In the engine compartment on the driver’s side
앫
In the engine compartment on the passenger side
i
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rating.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuse boxes in passenger compartment
There are two fuse boxes in the passenger
compartment. One fuse box is located in
the dashboard on the front passenger side.
An additional fuse box is located under the
right rear seat.
Fuse box in the dashboard
The following implements are located in
the vehicle tool kit in the trunk
(컄 page 295):
앫
The fuse chart. The amperages of the
fuses are also given there.
앫
Spare fuses
앫
Special fuse extractor
322
1 Cover
Practical hints
Fuses
!
Closing
Do not use sharp objects such as a
screw driver to open the fuse box in the
dashboard, as this could damage it.
왘
Press cover 1 back on.
Fuse box in the rear passenger
compartment
Opening
왘
Open the passenger door.
왘
Using the flat of your hand, press on
the middle of the cover.
Opening
왘
Pull cover 1 away from fuse box
(arrow).
왘
Remove cover rearward.
Closing
왘
Press cover back on until it engages.
The edge of cover 1 lifts up slightly
from the dashboard.
왘
Insert flat, blunt object into the edge of
the cover as a lever.
왘
Loosen cover 1 from the dashboard using lever.
왘
Using your hands, pull cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.
1 Cover
323
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse boxes in engine compartment
!
The cover must fit properly and the
slide must be positioned at the ‹
symbol, as moisture or dirt may impair
the functionality of the fuses.
There are two fuse boxes located in the engine compartment on both the driver’s and
front passenger side in front of the firewall
(dividing wall between engine compartment and passenger compartment).
Emergency engine shut-down
1 Fuse box cover, front passenger side
2 Slide
Opening
1 Fuse box cover, driver’s side
2 Slide
324
왘
Push both slides 2 to the Πsymbol.
왘
Remove cover 1.
Closing
왘
Replace cover 1 and press it down by
hand.
왘
Push both slides 2 to the ‹ symbol.
If the engine can no longer be stopped using the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button, the engine can be
turned off by withdrawing two fuses.
For easy removal of fuses, use the fuse extractor (supplied with vehicle tool kit) to
pull out the fuses marked on the fuse chart
as “ENGINE EMERGENCY STOP”.
The fuse chart is also located in the vehicle
tool kit (컄 page 295).
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and Tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Consumer information
325
Technical data
Spare parts service
Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of original spare parts required for maintenance and repair work. In
addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable
parts service.
More than 300000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are
subjected to stringent quality inspections.
Each part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare
parts should be installed.
326
!
The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
327
Technical data
Identification labels
Identification labels
1 Certification label
(on driver’s B pillar)
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
(below right rear passenger seat)
3 Engine number (engraved on engine)
4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)
5 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission control system
6 Emission control label
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
328
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
CL 500
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
CL 55 AMG
The CL 55 AMG has two poly-V-belts (belt
one shown in purple/belt two shown in
black).
1 Idler pulley
2 Automatic belt tensioner
3 Power steering pump
4 Air conditioning compressor
5 Crankshaft
6 Coolant pump
7 Generator (alternator)
8 Idler pulley
9 Automatic belt tensioner
10 Super charger
CL 600
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
8 Idler pulley
9 Idler pulley
329
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model
CL 500 (215.375)1
CL 55 AMG (215.374)1
CL 600 (215.376)1
Engine
113
113
275
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injec- 4-stroke engine, gasoline injec- 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
tion
tion
No. of cylinders
8
8
12
Bore
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
3.23 in (82.00 mm)
Stroke
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3.60 in (92.00 mm)
3.43 in (87.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
303.5 cu.in. (4966 cm )
331.8 cu.in. (5439 cm )
336.4 cu.in. (5513 cm3)
Compression ratio
10:1
9:1
9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
302 hp/5500 rpm
(225 kW/5500 rpm)
493 hp/6100 rpm
(368 kW/6100 rpm)
493 hp/5000 rpm
(368 kW/5000 rpm)
Maximum torque
acc. to SAE J 1349
339 ft.lb/2700 rpm
(460 Nm/2700 rpm)
517 ft.lb/2750–4000 rpm
(700 Nm/2750–4000 rpm)
590 ft.lb/1800–3500 rpm
(800 Nm/1800–3500 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6000 rpm
6500 rpm
5950 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
Poly-V-belt
7 ft 10 in (2390 mm)
Belt one: 4 ft 3 in (1289 mm)
Belt two: 8 ft 1 in (2462 mm)
7 ft 8 in (2335 mm)
1
3
3
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
330
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Rims and Tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as
앫
poor handling characteristics
앫
increased noise
앫
increased fuel consumption
!
i
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle can be the result.
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
pressure table is located on the fuel filler cap of the vehicle. The tire pressure
should be checked regularly and
should only be adjusted on cold tires.
Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with
vehicle.
331
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Same size tires
CL 500
(except Sport Package*)
CL 600
(except Sport Package*)
CL 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
7½J x17 H2
8J x18 H21
8J x18 H2 or 8½J x18 EH22
Wheel offset
1.81 in (46 mm)
1.73 in (44 mm)
96Y1
1.73 in (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
-
245/45 R18
All season tires (radial-ply tires)
225/55 R17 97H M+S AS
-
-
225/55 R17 97H M+S
245/45 R18 100V XL M+S1 or
245/45 R18 100V XL M+S or
245/45 R18 96H M+S
Winter tires (radial-ply tires)
1
2
For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Must not be used with snow chains
332
245/45 R18 96H M+S1
-
Technical data
Rims and Tires
Mixed size tires
CL 500 and CL 600 (Sport Package*)
Front axle
CL 55 AMG
EH21
AMG light alloy rims
8½J x 18
Wheel offset
1.73 in (44 mm)
8½J x 18 EH21
1.73 in (44 mm)
245/45 R18 100Y XL1
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R18 100Y XL
Rear axle
AMG light alloy rims
9J x 18 EH21
Wheel offset
1.73 in (44 mm)
9J x 18 EH21
1.73 in (44 mm)
1
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 265/40 R18 101Y XL or 265/40 R18 97Y 265/40 R18 101Y XL1
1
1
Must not be used with snow chains
Spare wheel
CL 500 (except Sport Package)
CL 600 (except Sport Package*)
CL 500 and CL 600 (Sport Package*)
CL 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
7½J x 17 H2
8J x 18 H2
Wheel offset
2.0 in (51 mm)
1.73 in (44 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires)
-
245/45 R18 96Y
All season tires (radial-ply tires)
225/55 R17 97H M+S AS
-
333
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model
CL 500
CL 55 AMG
CL 600
Generator (alternator)
14 V/150 A
14 V/180 A
14 V/180 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.7 kW
12 V/1.8 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
Battery
12 V/95 Ah
12 V/95 Ah
12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs
Bosch F 8 DPP332
NGK PFR 5 R-11
NGK ILFR 6 A
NGK NFR 6Q-G
Electrode gap
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
0.028 in (0.7 mm)
Tightening torque
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)
334
Technical data
Main Dimensions
Main Dimensions
Model
CL 500
CL 55 AMG
CL 600
Overall vehicle length
196.4 in (4989 mm)
196.4 in (4989 mm)
196.4 in (4989 mm)
Overall vehicle width
73.1 in (1857 mm)
73.1 in (1857 mm)
73.1 in (1857 mm)
Overall vehicle height
55.4 in (1408 mm)
55.4 in (1408 mm)
55.4 in (1408 mm)
Wheelbase
113.6 in (2885 mm)
113.6 in (2885 mm)
113.6 in (2885 mm)
Track, front
62.1 in (1577 mm)
62.2 in (1581 mm)
62.1 in (1577 mm)
Track, rear
62.1 in (1578 mm)
62.1 in (1578 mm)
62.1 in (1578 mm))
335
Technical data
Weights
Weights
Roof load max.
220 lb (100 kg)
Trunk load max.
220 lb (100 kg)
336
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
brands tested and recommended by us.
Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine with oil filter
CL 500
CL 55 AMG
CL 600
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
Recommended engine oils
Automatic transmission
CL 500
CL 55 AMG
CL 600
9.1 US qt (8.6 l)
9.1 US qt (8.6 l)
8.1 US qt (7.7 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Oil1
Rear axle
1.7 US qt (1.6 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
Hydraulic system for ABC
approx. 4.2 US qt (4.0 l)
MB Hydraulic fluid
Power steering
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid
(Pentosin CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs
approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system
0.7 US qt (0.7 l)
Cooling system
1
CL 500
CL 55 AMG
CL 600
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
approx. 12.1 US qt (11.5 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
approx. 15.3 US qt (14.5 l)
approx. 15.85 US qt (15 l)
MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10
337
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Low temperature cooling system
CL 600
2.43 US qt (2.3 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
CL 500
CL 55 AMG
23.2 US gal (88.0 l)
2.9 US gal (11.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane Rating of min 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON)
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
CL 600
23.2 US gal (88.0 l)
2.9 US gal (11.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane Rating of min 93
(average of 98 RON/88 MON)
Air conditioning system
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning system:
1
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG
lubricant oil (never R-12)
7.1 US qt (6.7 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 344).
338
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils
Engine oil additives
Air conditioning refrigerant
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use
only engine oils recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on recommended brands is available in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may be harmful to the engine operation.
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil is used in the air conditioning system.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil, otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Please follow FSS recommendations for
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so
could result in engine damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
339
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Premium unleaded gasoline
!
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
앫
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information.
340
Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.
앫
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
앫
Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.
앫
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
Fuel requirements
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
meeting ASTM standard D 439:
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be min. 91 for CL 500 and
CL 55 AMG and min. 93 for CL 600. It
is an average of both the Research (R)
octane number and the Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2). This is also
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE not to exceed 15%.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
Do not blend any specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
costs and may be harmful to the engine operation.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
341
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
앫
Corrosion protection
앫
Freeze protection
앫
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately –22°F (–30°C) and corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
–22°F (–30°C), the boiling point of the
coolant in the pressurized cooling system
is reached at approximately 266°F
(130°C).
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase in the boil-over
protection. You should have it replaced
every 15 years or 150000 miles
(250000 km), whichever comes first.
342
Coolant system design and coolant used
stipulate the replacement interval. The
above replacement interval is only applicable if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze
solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet)
are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45%
anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to
freeze protection to approx. –22°F
(–30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze
protection to approx. –49°F (–45°C)], the
engine temperature will increase due to
the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than
this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze
should be used to bring it up to the proper
level (have cooling system checked for
signs of leakage). Please make sure that
the mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/ antifreeze coolant used in such engines be
specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/
antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anticorrosion/ Antifreeze Agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model
Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C)
– 49°F (– 45°C)
6.1 US qt (5.75 l)
6.7 US qt (6.3 l)
CL 55 AMG 7.7 US qt (7.25 l)
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
CL 600
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
CL 500
6.3 US qt (6.0 l)
343
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
systems are supplied from the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approx. 7.1 US qt. (6.7 l).
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available
pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/
antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and water:
앫
Warning
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
may burn. You can be seriously burned.
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water].
For temperatures below freezing use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and commercially available pre-mixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].
344
Technical data
Consumer information
Consumer information
The following text is published as required
of all manufacturers of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966.”
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Tread wear Traction
Temperature
200
A
AA
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Tread wear
Traction
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straightedge braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
345
Technical data
Consumer information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
346
Warning
G
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Technical terms
ABC
(Active Body Control)
Active, computer-controlled system
that hydraulically adjusts the suspension at all four wheels in response to
various driving situations.
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The
system will automatically deactivate
the passenger front airbag when such a
seat is properly installed (PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console lights up). See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the passenger side airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bi-Xenon headlamps
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a breakdown.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
347
Technical terms
COMAND
(Cockpit Management and Data System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and navigation, as well as for other optional
equipment (CD changer, telephone,
etc.).
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to adjust settings.
Cruise control
A driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
348
Distronic*
A driving convenience cruise control
system which helps the driver maintain
a pre-selected speed:
앫
If there is no vehicle directly ahead,
the system operates in the same
way as conventional ->cruise control.
앫
If a slower moving vehicle is ahead,
Distronic will reduce your vehicle
speed to the extent permitted by reduced throttle and up to 20% braking power to maintain the preset
minimum following distance.
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.
Technical terms
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
FSS
(Flexible Service System)
Service indicator in the multifunction
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer,
engine temperature and fuel gauge.
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.
KEYLESS-GO*
System for entering and operating the
vehicle without the use of a key.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Line of fall
The direct line that an object moves
downhill when influenced by the force
of gravity alone.
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.
Memory function
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and mirror positions for
each key or, if so equipped, KEYLESS-GO* feature.
Menu
The control system displays are arranged in menus. Each menu contains
a number of commands for particular
systems. In the Audio menu, for example, you will find the commands SELECT
RADIO STATION or OPERATE CD player.
Using commands you can directly
change the settings for your vehicle.
349
Technical terms
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
Display field in the speedometer used
to present information provided by the
control system.
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
of the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
350
Parktronic*
System which uses visual and acoustic
signals to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, including:
앫
Engine
앫
Clutch/torque converter
앫
Transmission
앫
Transfer case
앫
Drive shaft
앫
Differential
앫
Axle shafts/axles
Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmission between sport operation S and
comfort operation C.
CL 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift control and manual shift program:
in addition to S and C (see above), you
can use the M for manual operation.
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics
Transmission of vehicle data and current location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for subscribers to Tele Aid service.
REST
(Residual engine heat utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off.
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and
child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.
Technical terms
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission selector lever from being inadvertently moved out
of position P without key turned and
brake pedal depressed.
Speedshift
Steering wheel gearshift control and
manual shift program. In the manual
shift program mode you can change
the gears yourself on the steering
wheel or by using the selector lever.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and airbags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Tele Aid System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Telematics
A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics”.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).
351
352
Index
A
ABC 190, 347
Messages in display 271
Setting vehicle level 191
ABS 23, 71, 347
ABS control 72
Malfunction indicator lamp 265
Messages in display 272
Warning lamp 265
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 148
Accident
In case of 48
Activating
Air conditioner (cooling) 166
Air recirculation mode 163
Anti-theft alarm system 77
Central locking (control system) 139
Charcoal filter 164
Distance warning function* 188
Distronic* 184
Easy-entry/exit feature 140
ESP 75
Exterior headlamps 46
Exterior lamps 109
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position 152
Front and rear fog lamp 109
Hazard warning flasher 111
Headlamps 46
High beams 111
Ignition 31
Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button 33
Immobilizer 51, 76
Rear window defroster 165
Residual heat 167
Seat heater 103, 104
Seat ventilation* 102
Tow-away alarm 78
Windshield wipers 47
Activating steering wheel gearshift
control 149
Downshifting 150
Upshifting 150
Adding
Coolant 243
Engine oil 241
Additional turn signals 302
Adjustable air vents, rear passenger
compartment 168
Adjusting 34
Air distribution 161
Air volume 162
Backrest tilt 36
Exterior rear view mirror 38
Folding forward front seat
backrests 100
Head restraint height 36
Head restraint tilt 36
Inside rear view mirror 38
Instrument cluster illumination 114
Lumbar support 96
Mirrors 38
Multicontour seat* 99
Seat cushion depth 36, 99
Seat cushion tilt 36
Seat fore and aft adjustment 36
Seat height 36
Seat in the lumbar region 99
Seat in the shoulder region 99
Seats 34
Steering column height 38
Steering column length 38
Steering wheel 37
353
Index
Air conditioner (cooling)
Turning off 166
Air pressure see Tire inflation
pressure 247
Air recirculation mode 163
Activating 163
Deactivating 164
Air vents, rear passenger compartment
Adjustable 168
Air volume
Adjusting 162
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 269
Airbags 55
BabySmartTM deactivation
system 65, 347
Children 56
Front 59
Passenger 59
Safety guidelines 58
Side impact 59
Window curtain 59
Alarm
Audible 70, 77
Canceling 77
Visual 77
354
Alarm system
Anti-theft 77
Anti-theft alarm system
indicator lamp 25
Alignment bolt 311
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 295, 347
Antiglare
Automatic 151
Antilock brake system (ABS) 347
Antilock Brake System see ABS 23
Anti-theft alarm system
Activating 77
Canceling alarm 77
Deactivating 77
Anti-theft systems 76
Anti-theft alarm system 77
Anti-theft alarm system indicator
lamp 25
Immobilizer 76
Tow-away alarm 78
Armrest
Storage compartment in front of 200,
201
Storage compartment in front of
armrest 200
Ashtray 206
At the gas station 235
ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 242
AUDIO menu 122
Selecting radio station 122
Audio system
CD mode 123
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 151
Automatic central locking
Activating/deactivating (control
system) 139
Automatic climate control 157
Air recirculation mode 163
Defrosting 162
Rear window defroster 165
Setting the temperature 160
Automatic headlamp mode 109
Automatic lighting control
Activating 112
Deactivating 112
Automatic locking when driving 94
Index
Automatic transmission 143
Accelerator position 148
Activating steering wheel gearshift
control 149
Deactivating steering wheel
gearshift control 150
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 148
Fluid level 242
Gear ranges 145
Gear selector lever position 146
Gear shifting malfunctions 148
Kickdown 148
One-touch gearshifting 144
Program mode selector switch 147
Selector lever position 143
Starting the engine 43
Steering wheel gearshift control
(Speedshift) and manual shift program S 55 AMG 149
Transmission fluid 242
Winter program mode 147, 149
Auxiliary cup holder 204
Inserting 204
Removing 205
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 65, 347
Compatible child seats 65, 347
Self-test 66
Backrest supports
Lumbar region 99
Shoulder region 99
Backup lamps 303, 305
Bulbs 303
BAS 73, 347
Messages in display 273, 283
Batteries, KEYLESS-GO* card
Changing 300
Check lamp 85
Checking 85
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 299
Check lamp 81
Checking 82
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Checking 82
Battery discharged
Jump starting 316
Battery, vehicle 243, 313
Charging 314
Disconnecting 314
Reconnecting 315
Reinstalling 314
Removing 314
Bi-Xenon headlamps 347
Block heater* 253
Blocking
Rear window operation 69
Brake assist system (BAS) 347
Brake fluid 236, 340
Brake lamp bulbs 303
Brake lamp, high mounted 303
Brake pads
Message in display 275
Brakes 226
Warning lamp 267
Break-in period 224
355
Index
Bulbs, replacing 302
Additional turn signals 302
Backup lamps 303
Brake lamps 303
Fog lamps 302
Front lamps 302
High beam 302
High mounted brake lamp 303
License plate lamps 303, 306
Low beam 302
Parking lamps 302, 303, 305
Rear fog lamp 303, 305
Side marker lamps 302, 305
Standing lamps 302, 303, 305
Tail lamp assemblies 303, 305
Turn signal lamps 302, 303
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 347
California
Important notice 11
Calling up
Distronic* settings 128
Range (distance to empty) 130
Service indicator 255
CAN system 347
Cargo tie-down hooks 198
356
Catalytic converter 232
CD changer* 123
CD mode 123
CD player
Operating 123
Center console 25
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 269
Lower part 26
Upper part 25
Centigrade
Setting temperature units 134
Central locking
Automatic 94
From inside 95
Switch 95
Switching on/off (control
system) 139
Unlocking from inside 95
Central locking switch 95
Changing
Batteries (KEYLESS-GO* card) 300
Batteries (SmartKey) 299
Key setting 140
KEYLESS-GO* card setting 84
Vehicle level 192
Changing CDs 123
Charcoal filter 164
Activating 164
Deactivating 164
Charging
Vehicle battery 314
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
lamp 268
Checking
Batteries (KEYLESS-GO* card) 85
Coolant level 242
Oil level 236, 238
Oil level with the oil dipstick 240
Tire inflate pressure 236
Vehicle lighting 236
Vehicle lock status
(KEYLESS-GO* card) 86
Child safety 63
Airbags 56
Infant and child restraint systems 60,
63
LATCH child seat mounts 68
Child safety switch see Blocking of rear
window operation 69
Cigarette lighter 207
Index
Cleaning
Cup holder 260
Distronic* system sensor cover 259
Gear selector lever 260
Hard plastic trim items 260
Headlamps 154
Headliner 261
Instrument cluster 260
Leather upholstery 261
Light alloy wheels 260
Parktronic* system sensor 259
Plastic and rubber parts 261
Seat belts 261
Steering wheel 260
Windows 260
Windshield 47
Wiper blades 259
Clock 23
Closing
Cup holder 204
Glove box 199
Hood 238
Side windows 170
Side windows with KEYLESS-GO* 86
Sliding/pop-up roof 173, 301
With SmartKey 174
Sliding/pop-up roof with
KEYLESS-GO* 86, 172, 175
Trunk 90
Windows 169
Windows with
KEYLESS-GO* 172, 175
Windows with SmartKey 171
Closing sliding/pop-up roof
In an emergency 301
Cockpit 20, 347
Cockpit management and data system
(COMAND) 348
COMAND 348
COMAND see separate operating instructions
Combination switch 111
High beam flasher 46, 111
Turn signals 46
Windshield wipers 47
Consumer information 345
Control and operation of radio
transmitters 232
Control system 117, 348
AUDIO menu 122
Convenience submenu 140
Display digital speedometer 122
Distronic* menu 128
Functions 119, 121
Instrument cluster submenu 134
Lighting submenu 135
Malfunction memory menu 130
Menus 120, 121, 349
Multifunction display 117
Multifunction steering wheel 118
NAVI menu 127
Operating
CD player 123
Selecting radio system 122
Settings menu 131
Standard display menu 122
Submenus 119, 121
TEL* menu 125
Trip computer menu 129
Vehicle submenu 139
Convenience submenu 140
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature 140
Setting automatic locking 139
Setting fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors 142
Setting parking position for exterior
rear view mirror 142
357
Index
Coolant 242
Adding 243
Checking level 242
Messages in display 277, 278
Temperature 234
Temperature gauge 115
Warning lamp 278
Coolant level 236
Checking 242
Courtesy lighting 113
Cruise control 176, 348
Canceling 177
Driving downhill 177
Driving uphill 177
Fine adjustment 178
Lever 183
Saving current speed 177
Setting speeds 178
Cruise control lever 176
Cup holder
Cleaning 260
Closing 204
In front seat armrest 202
In rear seat armrest 203
Opening 204
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 347
358
D
Daytime running lamp mode 110
Setting 136
Deactivating
Air conditioner (cooling) 166
Air recirculation mode 164
Alarm 77
Anti-theft alarm system 77
Automatic climate control 166
Central locking (control system) 139
Cruise control 177
Defrost 162
Distance warning function* 188
Distronic* 186
Engine with KEYLESS-GO* 51
Engine with the key 51
ESP 75
Exterior lamps 109
Hazard warning flasher 111
Headlamps 50
Immobilizer 76
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off 138
Rear window defroster 165
Residual heat 167
Seat heater 103, 104
Seat ventilation* 102
Tow-away alarm 78
Deactivating steering wheel gearshift
control 150
Deceleration
With Distronic* 182
Deep water see Standing water 231
Defrosting 162
Delayed switch-off
Interior lighting 138
Dialing
A number (telephone) 126
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while
driving 48
With starting 44
Digital speedometer 122
Direction of rotation (tires) 247
Discharged battery
Jump starting 316
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 314
Index
Displays
Digital speedometer 122
Distronic* 181
Messages 239, 270
Service indicator 254
Showing malfunctions 131
Distance
Decreasing in Distronic* 187
Increasing in Distronic* 187
Setting in Distronic* 186
Warning function 187
Distance to empty (range)
Calling up 129
Distance warning function* 187
Activating 188
Deactivating 188
Distronic* warning lamp 187
Intermittent warning sound 187
Symbol in multifunction display 128
Distronic* 179, 348
Activated 183
Activating 184
Calling up settings 128, 182
Cleaning system sensor 259
Cruise control lever 183
Deactivated 183
Deactivating 186
Deceleration 182
Decreasing distance 187
Decreasing time interval 186
Displays in the speedometer dial 181
Distance warning function 187
Driving hints 188
Fine adjustment 185
Increasing distance 187
Increasing time interval 186
Intermittent signal tone 181
Malfunction indicator lamp 265
Menu 182
Messages in display 280
Resetting stored speed 185
Sensor cover 259
Setting a higher speed 184
Setting a lower speed 185
Setting following distance 186
Setting the current speed 184
Warning and indicator lamps 181
Warning lamp 265
Door control panel 19, 28
Door handle 28
Door unlock
With Tele Aid 216
Doors
Message in display 280
Opening from inside vehicle 87
Opening from outside 81
Downhill driving
Cruise control 177
Downshifting 144, 150
Drink holder see Cup holder 202
Drinking and driving 225
Driving
Abroad 231
General instructions 40, 225
Hydroplaning 229
In winter 230
Problems 48
Safety systems 71
Through standing water 231
With Distronic* 188
Driving abroad 231
Driving instructions 225
Driving off 227
Driving safety systems
ABS 71
BAS 73
ESP 73
359
Index
Driving systems 176
ABC 190
Cruise control 176
Distronic* 179
Driving safety systems 71
Parktronic* 193
Vehicle level control 191
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 96
Activating 140
Electrical fuses 322
Electrical system 334
Electronic Stability Program see ESP 23,
73, 348
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 212
With Tele Aid 211
Emergency engine shut-down 324
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 148
Emergency operations
Closing sliding/pop-up roof 301
Locking the vehicle 298
Opening sliding/pop-up roof 301
Remote door unlock 216
Unlocking the trunk lid 298
360
Unlocking the vehicle 297
Emergency tensioning device see
ETD 63, 349
Emission control 233
Ending
A call (telephone) 126
Engine 330
Compartment 237
Message in display 268
Starting 43
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 43
Starting with the key 43
Turning off with the key 51
Engine cleaning 257
Engine compartment 237
Fuse box in 324
Hood 237
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 23,
268
Engine number 348
Engine oil 238
Adding 241
Additives 339
Checking level 238
Consumption 238
Display messages 281
Filler neck 241
Messages in display 239, 282
Viscosity 348
Engine oil level
see Oil level 236, 238, 240
Entry position
Messages in display 294
ESP 23, 73, 348
Switching off 75
Switching on 75
Warning lamp 264
ETD 349
Safety guidelines 58
ETD (Emergency tensioning device) 63
Exterior lamp switch 108
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 38
Folding 152
Parking position for 142
Index
F
Fahrenheit
Setting temperature units 134
Fastening the seat belts 40
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 178
Distronic* 185
First aid kit 295
Flat tire 308
Lowering the vehicle 312
Mounting the Spare wheel 308
Preparing the vehicle 308, 309
Flexible Service System (FSS) 254, 349
Fog lamp, rear 110, 303
Replacing bulb 305
Fog lamps
Replacing bulbs 302
Fog lamps, front
Messages in display 287
Switching on 110
Folding
Exterior rear view mirrors 152
Front airbags 59
Front lamps
Messages in display 286– 287
Replacing bulbs 302, 304
Switching on 108
Front seat
Head restraints 97
Head restraints installing 97
Head restraints removing 97
FSS (Flexible Service System) 254, 349
Fuel 235
Fuel reserve warning lamp 268
Premium unleaded gasoline 235
Reserve warning lamp 23
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 129
Since last reset 129
Fuel filler flap 235
Locking 235
Opening 300
Unlocking 235
Fuel reserve tank
Message in display 284
Fuel tank
Filler flap 235
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 337
Functions (control system) 119, 121
Resetting 132
Fuse box 322, 324
Fuse chart 295
Fuses 322
Fuse box in dashboard 322
Fuse box in engine compartment 324
Fuse box in passenger
compartment 322
Fuse box in the rear passenger
compartment 323
Fuse chart 295
Fuse extractor 295
Spare fuses 295
G
Garage door opener 27, 217
Erasing in remote control 220
Integrated remote control 218
Rolling code programming 219
Gasoline see Fuel 235
Gear range 349
Automatic transmission 145
Limiting 145
Shifting into optimal 144
Gear range limit
Canceling 144
361
Index
Gear selector lever
Cleaning 260
Position 146
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission 43
Global
Locking 81
Unlocking 81
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Glove box 21, 199
Closing 199
Opening 199
Good visibility 151
GPS 210, 349
349
H
Hand-held transmitter
Programming integrated remote
control 218
Hands-free microphone 27
Hard plastic trim items
Cleaning 260
Hazard warning flasher 111
Switching off 111
Switching on 111
Head restraints 97
Headlamp cleaning system 236
362
Headlamps
Automatic control 109
Bi-Xenon 347
Cleaning 258
Cleaning system 154, 244, 344
Refilling washer fluid 244
Switching off 50
Switching on 46
Headliner
Cleaning 261
Heated steering wheel* 208
Height adjustment
Head restraints 36
Steering wheel 37
Height adjustments
Vehicle level 191
High beam flasher 46, 111
High beam headlamps
Messages in display 286
Replacing bulbs 302
Switching on 111
High mounted brake lamp 303
Hood 237
Closing 238
Message in display 284
Opening 237
Hydroplaning
229
I
Identification labels
Certification label 328
Emission control label 328
Engine number 328
Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission
control system 328
VIN (vehicle identification
number) 328
VIN, visible 328
Ignition 31
Immobilizer 76
Activating 76
Deactivating 76
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Infant and child restraint systems 63
Installing 67
LATCH child seat mounts 68
Information
About service and warranty 10
Button for Tele Aid 214
Index
Inside rear view mirror
Adjusting 38
Antiglare 151
Installing
Infant and child restraint systems 67
Wiper blades 307
Instrument cluster 21, 22, 114, 349
Cleaning 260
Coolant temperature gauge 115
Illumination 114
Multifunction display 117
Outside temperature indicator 116
Selecting language 135
Instruments and controls see Cockpit 20
Integrated remote control
Canadian programming 220
Erasing memory 220
Hand-held transmitter 218
Operating 220
Rolling code programming 219
Interior lighting 112
Activating automatic control 112
Deactivating automatic control 112
Delayed switch-off 138
Manual operation 113
Interior storage spaces 199
Cup holder 202
Glove box 199
Parcel net 205
Storage compartment in front of
armrest 200, 201
J
Jump starting
316
K
Key positions in starter switch 31
Key, KEYLESS-GO* card
Changing the batteries 300
Key, mechanical 297
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp 81
Changing the batteries 299
Checking the batteries 82
Factory setting 81
Global locking 81
Global unlocking 81
Loss of 82
Positions in starter switch 31
Remote controls 80
Restoring to factory setting 81
Selective setting 81
Starting the engine 43
Turning off the engine 51
Unlocking with 30
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* 33
KEYLESS-GO* 349
Activating ignition with 33
Closing side windows 86
Closing sliding/pop-up roof 86
Closing sliding/pop-up roof
with 172, 175
Closing windows with 172, 175
Locking the vehicle 86
Messages in display 276
Starting the engine 43
Turning off engine 51
Unlocking with 32
363
Index
KEYLESS-GO* card 83
Central locking 84
Changing the batteries 299
Checking the batteries 82, 85
Checking vehicle lock status 86
Factory setting 84
Locking the vehicle 86
Loss of 87
Messages in display 276
Reprogramming 84
Restoring to factory setting 81
Turning off the engine 51
Unlocking 83
Unlocking with 32
Keys 80
Kickdown 148, 349
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 134
Km/h or mph in speedometer 134
L
Lamp bulbs, exterior 302
Lamps, exterior
Front 302
Light sensor 285
Messages in display 287
Rear 303
364
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 265
Battery (SmartKey) 81
Brakes 267
CHECK ENGINE 268
Coolant 277
Distronic*
DTR* 181, 265
Engine diagnostics 268
ESP 75, 264
Fuel reserve 268
Instrument cluster 264–268
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 65, 269
Seat belts 266
Service indicator 254
SRS 55
Tow-away alarm 78
Turn signals 23
Language
Multifunction display 135
Setting 135
LATCH child seat anchors 68
LATCH child seat mounts 68
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 329
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 261
Lever
For cruise control 183
License plate lamps
Replacing bulbs 303, 306
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 260
Light sensor 285
Lighter see Cigarette lighter 207
Lighting 108
Automatic headlamp mode 109
Combination switch 111
Daytime running lamp mode 110
Exterior lamp switch 108
Front fog lamps 110
High beam flasher 111
High beams 111
Instrument cluster illumination 114
Interior 112
Locator lighting 110
Low beam 108
Manual headlamp mode 109
Night security illumination 110
Parking lamps 108
Rear fog lamp 110
Settings (control system) 135
Limiting the gear range 145
Index
Limp Home Mode 148
Line of fall 349
Loading 197
Cargo tie-down hooks 198
Instructions 197
Roof rack 197
Locator lighting 110
Setting 136
Lock button 349
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 52
SmartKey 30, 80
Trunk 86
Locking 49, 80
Central (KEYLESS-GO* card) 84
Fuel filler flap 235
Global, SmartKey 81
The vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 86
Trunk lid, separately 90
Vehicle in an emergency 298
Loss of
KEYLESS-GO* card 87
Mechanical key 82
SmartKey 82
Low beam headlamps
Messages in display 286, 287
Replacing bulbs 302
Lowering
Vehicle 312
Lumbar support adjustment 96
M
Main Dimensions 335
Maintenance 12, 254
Malfunction memory 130
Calling up 130
Displaying 131
Manual headlamp mode 109
Manual operations
Fuel filler flap 300
Interior lighting control 113
Locking the vehicle 298
Sliding/pop-up roof 301
Unlocking the driver’s door 297
Unlocking the trunk lid 298
Massage function 100
MAXCOOL maximum cooling 162
Mechanical key 297
Memory function 105, 349
Recalling positions from
memory 106
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking positions 107
Storing key dependent settings 106
Menus 119
AUDIO 122
Control system 349
Distronic* 128, 182
In control system 120, 121
Malfunction memory 130
NAVI 127
Operating
CD player 123
Settings menu 131
Standard display 122
Submenus 119
TEL* 125
Trip computer 129
Microphone
Hands-free microphone 27
Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Setting 134
365
Index
Mirrors
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position 152
Adjusting 38
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 151
Exterior rear view mirror 38
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position 142
Exterior rear view mirror parking
positions 142
Inside rear view mirror 38
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 107
MON (Motor Octane Number) 235, 350
Mph or km/h in speedometer 134
Multicontour seat* 99
Multifunction display 24, 117, 350
Selecting language 135
Standard display 121
366
Multifunction display messages
ABC 271
ABS 272
BAS 273, 283
Brake fluid 275
Brake pads 275
Check engine 268
Coolant 278
Coolant level 277
Distronic* 280
Doors 280
Engine 268
Engine oil level 282
Entry position 294
Fuel reserve tank 284
Hood 284
Key 284
KEYLESS-GO* card 276
Lamps 287
Parking brake 288
Selector lever 280
Tele Aid 293
Telephone* 294
Tires 291
Trunk 294
Washer fluid 294
Multifunction
steering wheel 24, 118, 350
Buttons 118
N
Navigation system
Operating 127
See separate COMAND* operating instructions
Night security illumination 110
O
Occupant safety 54
Airbags 55
Children and airbags 56
Children in the vehicle 63
Fastening the seat belt 40
Infant and child restraint systems 63
LATCH child seat mounts 68
Seat belts 40, 58
Odometer, main 23
Odometer, trip 23
Index
Oil
Adding 241
Checking level 238
Consumption 238
Filler neck 241
Viscosity 348
Oil level
Checking 236, 238, 240
One-touch gearshifting 144
Canceling gear range limit 144
Downshifting 144
Upshifting 144
Opening
Ashtray 206
Cup holder 204
Doors from the inside 87
Fuel filler flap 235
Fuel filler flap manually 300
Glove box 199
Hood 237
Side windows 170
Sliding/pop-up roof 173, 301
In an emergency 301
With SmartKey 174
Storage space in the armrest 201
Storage space in the center
console 201
Trunk 89
Trunk from the inside 88
Windows 169, 170
Windows with SmartKey 171
Operating
CD player 123
COMAND* see separate operating instructions
Garage door opener 220
Integrated remote control 220
Navigation system 127
Radio 122
Radio transmitters 232
Safety 16
Telephone* 125
Vehicle outside the USA and
Canada 13
Operating safety 16
Operator’s Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 258
Outside temperature indicator 116
Overdue service 254
Overhead control panel 27
Overspeed range 350
P
Paintwork 257
Panic alarm 70
Panic button on SmartKey 70
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell 205
Parcel net in trunk 206
Parking 49, 227
Parking brake 44, 50
Message in display 288
Releasing 44
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs 302, 303, 305
Switching on 108
Parking position
Exterior rear
view mirrors 107, 142, 152
Parktronic* 193, 350
Cleaning sensors 259
Warning indicators 195
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
Warning lamp 269
367
Index
Passenger compartment 231
Fuse box in 322
Inside rear view mirror 38
Interior lighting 112
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell 205
Passenger safety see Occupant
safety 54
Pedals 225
Phone book*
Loading 126
Quick search 126
Phone number*
Dialing 126
Redialing 127
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 261
Pliers, universal (vehicle tool kit) 295
Poly-V-belt drive 350
Positions (Memory function)
Recalling from memory 106
Positions (Memory function*)
Storing into memory 106
Power assistance 225
Power closing assist
for doors and trunk lid 94
368
Power seat
Adjusting backrest tilt 36
Adjusting head restraint height 36
Adjusting head restraint tilt 36
Adjusting seat cushion depth 36
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 36
Adjusting seat height 36
Folding forward front seat
backrests 100
Front seat head restraints 97
Seat fore and aft adjustment 36
Power train 350
Power washer 257
Power windows 169
Blocking of rear window operation 69
Side windows 169
Synchronizing 172
Practical hints
First aid kit 295
Fuses 322
Lamp in center console 269
Lamps in instrument cluster 264
Messages in the display 270
Vehicle tool kit 295
Problems
While driving 48
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Program mode selector switch 350
Automatic transmission 147
PULSE function (Massage function) 100
Q
Quick search
Phone book*
126
R
Radio
Selecting stations 122
Station selection setting 139
Radio transmitters, control and
operation 232
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 130
Reading lamp 27
Rear fog lamp 303
Bulb 303
Switching on 110
Rear lamp bulbs
Replacing 305
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Index
Rear passenger compartment
Adjustable air vents 168
Rear seat head restraints
Folding back with switch 92, 97
Placing upright 98
Rear seats
Head restraints 97
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 151
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window
Blocking operation 69
Rear window defroster 165
Activating 165
Deactivating 165
Rear window sunshade* 156
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 315
Regular checks 236
Regular driving style 191
Reinstalling vehicle battery 314
Remote controls
Integrated 218
SmartKey 80
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid 216
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 350
Removing
Vehicle battery 314
Wheel 311
Replacing
Backup lamp bulbs 305
Brake lamp bulbs 305
Bulbs 302
Front lamp bulbs 304
License plate lamp bulbs 306
Parking lamp bulbs 305
Rear fog lamp bulb 305
Rear fog lamp bulbs 305
Rear lamp bulbs 303, 305
Rear turn signal bulbs 305
Side marker lamp bulbs 305
Standing lamp bulbs 305
Wiper blades 307
Reporting
Safety defects 18
Reset button in the instrument
cluster 132
Resetting
All functions (control system) 132
All functions of a submenu 132
Fuel consumption 129
Service indicator (FSS) 255
Stored speed in Distronic* 185
Trip odometer 115
Residual heat utilization 167, 350
Residual ventilation 167
REST (Residual engine heat
utilization) 350
Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems 63, 67
Rims and Tires 331
Roadside Assistance
Tele Aid 213
Roadside assistance 12
Rolling code programming 219
RON (Research Octane
Number) 235, 351
Roof rack 197
Rotating wheels 251
Rubber parts
Cleaning 261
369
Index
S
Safety
Occupant 54
Safety belts see Seat belts 40
Safety defects
Reporting 18
Safety systems
Driving 71
Saving current speed 177
Screwdriver (vehicle tool kit) 295
Seat belt force limiter 63
Seat belts 60
Cleaning 261
Fastening 40
Proper use of 42, 62
Safety guidelines 58
Warning lamp 266
Seat cushion depth
Adjusting 99
Seat heater
Switching off 103
Switching on 103
Seat ventilation*
Switching off 102
Switching on 102
370
Seats 96
Adjusting 34
Adjusting lumbar support 99
Adjusting shoulder support 99
Easy entry/exit feature 96
Heater 103
Massage function 100
Multicontour seat* 99
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down hooks 198
Selector lever
Message in display 280
Position 143
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 66
Tele Aid 210
Service
Calling up the service indicator 255
Major service (Service B) 254
Minor service (Service A) 254
Overdue 254
Types 254
When due 254
Service (maintenance) 254
Service and warranty information 10
Service indicator 254
Calling up 255
Clearing 254, 255
Service life (tires) 247
Service System see FSS 254
Setting
Convenience functions 140
Cruise control 177
Daytime running lamp mode 136
Distronic* time interval 186
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position 142
Following distance in Distronic* 186
Higher speed in cruise control 178
Higher speed in Distronic* 184
Individual vehicle settings 131
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off 138
Lamps and lighting (control
system) 135
Language, multifunction display 135
Locator lighting 136
Lower speed in cruise control 178
Lower speed in Distronic* 185
Miles/kilometers in
speedometer 134
Index
Parking position for exterior rear view
mirrors 142
Slower speed in cruise control 178
Speed in cruise control 178
Speed in Distronic* 184
Speedometer display mode 134
Station selection mode 139
Suspension tuning 190
Temperature (interior) 160
Temperature indicator 134
Units
Speedometer 134
Temperature 134
Vehicle level control 191
Settings
Calling up Distronic* 128, 182
Convenience functions 140
Factory, SmartKey 81
Lighting (control system) 135
Menus and submenus 119
Resetting all (control system) 132
Resetting in the submenu 132
Selective 81
Settings menu
Functions in 131
Individual vehicle settings 131
Submenus 132
Shift lock 351
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 146
Into optimal gear range (automatic
transmission) 144
Shoulder support
Seat adjustment 99
Side impact airbags 59
Side marker lamps
Replacing bulbs 302, 303, 305
Side windows
Automatic closing 170
Automatic opening 170
Cleaning 260
Closing 169, 170, 171
Closing fully 170
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 86, 172,
175
Closing with SmartKey 171
Opening 169, 170, 171
Opening fully 170
Opening with SmartKey 171
Stopping 171
Synchronizing power windows 172
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Windshield wipers 47
Single wipe 47
Sliding/pop-up roof 173
Closing 173, 301
Closing with
KEYLESS-GO* 86, 172, 175
Closing with SmartKey 174
Opening 173, 301
Opening with SmartKey 174
Stopping 174
Synchronizing 175
SmartKey
Changing the batteries 299
Global locking and unlocking 81
Lock button 30, 80
Locking and unlocking 80
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up roof 174
Opening and closing windows 171
Unlock button 30, 80
Unlocking with 30
Snow chains 253
Spare fuses 295
371
Index
Spare parts service 326
Spare wheel
Mounting 308
Speed
Resetting stored speed in
Distronic* 185
Saving current 177
Speed settings
Cruise control 178
Distronic* 184, 185
Speedometer 23
Displaying gear range 145
Displays 181
Settings units 134
Speedometer display mode
Selecting 134
Sporty driving suspension 191
SRS 62, 351
Indicator lamp 266
SRS indicator lamp 54
Standing lamps 108
Replacing bulbs 302, 303, 305
Standing water
Driving instructions 231
372
Starter switch 21, 31
Positions 31
Switching on 43
Starting difficulties 44
Starting position 31
Starting the engine 42
Station selection
Setting 139
Steering column
Height adjustment 38
Length adjustment 38
Steering wheel
Adjusting 37
Buttons 24
Cleaning 260
Electrical adjustment 37
Heated steering wheel* 208
Height adjustment 38
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 217
Stopping
Sliding/pop-up roof 174
Windows 171
Storage compartments
Armrest 200, 201
Glove box 199
Storage spaces
Cup holder 204
Storage tray 201
Storing (Memory function*)
Positions into memory 106
Submenus
Convenience 140
For settings 119
In control system 121
Instrument cluster 134
Lighting 135
Resetting functions in Control
system 132
Selecting 132
Settings menu 132
Vehicle 139
Sun visors 155
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) 351
Suspension tuning
For regular driving style 191
For sporty driving style 191
Setting 190
Index
Switching off
Automatic central locking (control
system) 139
Engine 51
ESP 75
Hazard warning flasher 111
Headlamps 50
Switching on
Automatic central locking (control
system) 139
ESP 75
Front fog lamps 110
Front lamps 108
Hazard warning flasher 111
Headlamps 46
High beams 111
Parking lamps 108
Rear fog lamp 110
Windshield wipers 47
Symbol (Distronic*)
Distance warning function* 128
Synchronizing
Power windows 172
Sliding/pop-up roof 175
T
Tachometer 23, 115
Overspeed range 115
Tail lamps
Cleaning 258
Replacing bulbs 303, 305
Tar stains 257
Tele Aid 209
Emergency calls 211
Information 214
Initiating an emergency call
manually 212
Messages in display 293
Remote door unlock 216
Roadside Assistance 213
Stolen vehicle tracking services 217
System self-check 210
Upgrade signals 215
Tele Aid System 351
Telematics* 351
Telephone* 24, 208
Answering a call 126
Dialing a number from the phone
book 126
Ending a call 126
Hands-free microphone 27
Loading phone book* 126
Messages in display 294
Operating 125
Redialing 127
Temperature
Display mode 134
Setting interior temperature 160
Setting units in display 134
Tires 248
Tie-down hooks (Trunk) 198
Tightening torque 351
Tightening torque (Wheel bolts) 312
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 236, 247
Tire speed rating 229, 351
Tire traction 229
Tires 246, 345
Direction of rotation 247
Driving instructions 228
Messages in display 291
Retreads 246
Service life 247
Temperature 248
Tread depth 252
Wear pattern 251
Winter 252
373
Index
Tools 295
Tow-away alarm 25, 78
Arming 78
Disarming 78
Disarming for transport 78
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) 295
Installing 321
Towing the vehicle 318
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 217
Traction 147, 351
Transmission see Automatic
transmission 242
Tread depth (tires) 252
Trip computer 129
Trip odometer
Resetting 115
Trunk
Closing 90
Lock button 86
Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 86
Locking separately 90
Message in display 294
Opening 89
Opening from inside vehicle 88
Parcel net 206
374
Tie-down hooks 198
Trunk lid 89
Trunk lock 298
Unlocking in an emergency 298
Unlocking separately 91
Unlocking with SmartKey 82
Trunk lid emergency release 89
Turn signal lamps
Replacing bulbs 302, 303
Turn signals 46
Additional in mirrors 302
Cleaning lenses 258
Front bulbs 302, 304
Indicator lamps 23
Rear bulbs 303, 305
Turning off
Engine 51
U
Units
Setting speedometer units 134
Setting temperature units 134
Unlock button
SmartKey 30, 80
Trunk lid 80
Unlocking 30, 80
Central (KEYLESS-GO* card) 84
Driver’s door in an emergency 297
Fuel filler flap 235
Global 81
In an emergency 297
Selective settings 81
Trunk in an emergency 298
Trunk lid 80
Trunk lid with SmartKey 82
Trunk lid, separately 91
Vehicle in an emergency 216
With KEYLESS-GO* card 32
With the KEYLESS-GO* card 83
With the SmartKey 30
Unlocking the trunk lid 87
Upgrade signals
Tele Aid 215
Uphill driving
Cruise control 177
Upshifting 144, 150
Index
Useful features 199
Ashtrays 206
Cigarette lighter 207
Garage door opener 217
Interior storage spaces 199
Tele Aid 209
Telephone* 208
V
Vehicle
Individual settings 131, 133
Locking 25
Locking in an emergency 298
Lowering 312
Proper use of 16
Service battery 313
Towing 318
Unlocking 25
Unlocking in an emergency 297
Vehicle battery 313
Vehicle care 256
Cup holder 260
Distronic* system sensor cover 259
Engine cleaning 257
Gear selector lever 260
Hard plastic trim items 260
Headlamps 258
Instrument cluster 260
Leather upholstery 261
Light alloy wheels 260
Ornamental moldings 258
Paintwork 257
Parktronic* system sensor 259
Plastic and rubber parts 261
Power washer 257
Seat belts 261
Steering wheel 260
Tail lamps 258
Tar stains 257
Turn signals 258
Vehicle washing 258
Window cleaning 260
Wiper blades 259
Vehicle level 191
Changing 192
Setting 192
Automatic 192
Manual 192
Vehicle lighting
Checking 236
Vehicle lock status
Checking (KEYLESS-GO*) 86
Vehicle tool kit 295
Alignment bolt 295
Fuse chart 295
Fuse extractor 295
Hex-socket wrench 295
Open-end wrench 295
Screwdriver 295
Spare fuses 295
Universal pliers 295
Wheel wrench 295
Vehicle washing 258
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)
Voice control system* 351
Hands-free microphone 27
351
W
Warning indicators
Parktronic* 195
Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function* 187
Distronic* 181
Drivers seat belts 60
Parking brake 45
Warranty coverage 327
Washing the vehicle 256
375
Index
Wear pattern (tires) 251
Weights 336
Wheel change
Tightening torque 312
Wheels
Rotating 251
Tires and wheels 246
Window curtain airbags 59
Windows see Side windows
Windshield
Refilling washer fluid 244
Replacing wiper blades 307
Washer fluid 244, 344
Windshield washer 236
Windshield washer fluid
Message in display 294
Refilling 244, 344
Wiping with 47
376
Windshield wipers 47, 154
Fast wiper speed 47
Intermittent wiping 47
Replacing wiper blades 307
Single wipe 47
Switching on 47
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 47
Winter driving 252
Block heater* 253
Snow chains 253
Tires 252
Transmission program
mode 147, 149
Winter driving instructions 230
Winter tires 252
Wiper blades
Cleaning 259
Installing 307
Replacing 307
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 47
Interval 47
With windshield washer fluid 47
Wrench, hex-socket (vehicle tool kit) 295
Wrench, open-end (vehicle tool kit) 295
Wrench, wheel (vehicle tool kit) 295
X
Xenon headlamps
Bi-Xenon 347
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider
this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz website www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about service, maintenance and the carrying out thereof, seek the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2397-31
Press time 17/01/03
GSP/SIP
Printed in Germany